HP Photosmart 850 User Manual
user's manual u s e r ' s m a n u a l hp photosmart 850 digital camera user's manual
T ra d em ar k an d c op yr i gh t in form a ti on © Cop y r igh t 2002 Hew lett - P ac k ard Compan y All ri ghts ar e r ese rv ed . No part o f this doc ument may be pho toco pi ed, r epr oduced , or tr ansl ated t o anoth er language w ithou t the p ri or w r it t en conse nt of He wlett - P ac k ar d Com pany . T he inf or mati on containe d in this doc ument is sub ject to c hange w ithout no tice . He wle t t -P ac k ar d shall not be lia ble for er r or s cont ained her ein o r for conse quenti al damag es in conne cti on wi th the f ur nishing , perf or mance , or u se of this mat er ial . Mi cr oso f t® and W indo ws® ar e U .S . r e gis te r ed tra demarks of Microsoft Corporat ion. Appl e , Mac int osh , and Mac ar e r egister ed tr ademar ks of Appl e Comp uter , Inc. Th e SD logo is a tr ademar k of the SD Car d Assoc iati o n . Materi als dis posal T his HP pr oduct con tains the f ollo wing mat er ial s th at might r equir e spec ial han dling at end-of -life : z Mer cury in the flu or escen t lamp in th e image L CD . z Alk aline mangane se di o x ide- zinc o r lithium-ir on disulf id e AA batte r ie s. z Le ad i n the sol der and so me c o mponent le ads. Dispos al of t his mater ial can be r egulat ed be c au se of en v ir onment al consi der ation s. F or dispos al or re cy clin g in for mati on , please co nt act yo ur l ocal a uthor ities or the Electr onic I ndustr ies Alli an ce (EIA ) (w w w . ei ae.or g) .
Ta b l e o f C o n t e n t s Chapt er 1: Getting st ar ted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Cam era par ts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Setu p . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Attac hing the lens ca p tether . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Attac hing th e nec k str ap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Instal ling the b atteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 In stallin g the m emory c ard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Tu rning on po wer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Ch oosin g t he lan guage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Sett i ng the date and time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 In stalling the soft ware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Windo ws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Mac int osh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Cam era state s and menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Resto ring previo us se ttings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Chapt er 2: T aking pictures and recording video clip s . . . . 21 Using the disp lays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Using the diop ter con trol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Tak ing s till pict ures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Using still mod e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Using self- timer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Using instant revie w . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Using the fo cus brack ets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Using focu s lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Using the fo cus sett ings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Using expo sure comp ensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Using the po p-up fla sh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Rec ord in g audi o . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Rec ord in g video clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
hp phot osma r t 850 userâs m anu al Using zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Op tical zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Digi tal z oom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Using the c apture m enu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 Ex posur e mo de . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35 White balan ce . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36 AE meter ing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 IS O sp eed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 Col or . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 Reso lution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 Com pression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 Setu p . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 Chapt er 3: Review ing images and video cli p s . . . . . . . . . . 43 Using playba c k . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43 Using the pla y b ack me nu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Pl ay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47 Dele te . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48 Magn ify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48 Setu p . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49 Chapt er 4: Using hp inst ant sha re . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Using the sh are menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52 Using hp ins tant share to prin t pic ture s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53 Using the hp in stant share e-mail se rvice . . . . . . . . . .54 Addin g, mod ifyin g, and remo ving e- mail ad dresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Sel ecting images to be e-ma iled . . . . . . . . . . . .56 Windo ws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57 Mac int osh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Chapt er 5: Unloading, printing, and displa ying images . . . 5 9 Unlo ading to a c omput er . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Prin ting im ages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Displa ying im ages on a T V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Chapt er 6: Adjusting the camera settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 3 Using the setu p me nu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Aud io re cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 In stant revie w . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 5 Cam era sou nds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 5 Eye- Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 6 Date & time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 USB con f igu ration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 TV co nfigur ation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 8 Lan guage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Chapt er 7: T roubleshooting and support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Prob lems and solutio ns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Err o r messag es . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Getting assistan ce . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Fi nding h elp on the we b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 2 HP pro duct su ppor t . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 HP pho tos mart website . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 HP acce ssibility website . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 2 Cont acting hp custo mer supp ort . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 How hp can help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Be fore you ca ll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Obtaining s upport in the United State s . . . . . . . 83 Fr ee te lep hone su ppor t f or one ye ar . . . . . . 8 3 After the f irst year . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Upg rade d war r a nty option s . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Ob taining s u p port world wide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
hp phot osma r t 850 userâs m anu al Hewl ett-Packard limited warranty statem ent . . . . . . . .88 Regu latory infor mation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Appendix A: Batteries a nd came ra acce ssories . . . . . . . . . . 9 1 Man aging ba tteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91 Ex tending battery life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92 Rec harge able batter ies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92 Po wer co nservatio n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93 Pu rcha sing came ra a ccesso ries . . . . . . . . . . . . .93 Appendix B: Camera doc k . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Unl oadi ng i mage s to a com puter usin g th e doc k . . . . 9 7 Prin ting imag es us ing the dock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97 Displa y in g im ages on a TV using th e dock . . . . . . . . 98 Appendix C: S peci fi c ations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 9 Mem ory car d capa city . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
Ch apter 1: G et ti ng s tar te d 9 C hapter 1 : Get ting started Th e HP Pho tosmart 850 di g ital camera is a 4. 1 M egap ix el cam er a with 8x optica l z oom a nd 7x digit al z oom. T hi s came r a has an e x c itin g ne w f eatur e calle d HP Inst an t Shar e technolo gy . Wi t h HP I nst ant S hare , y ou can se lect im ages t o pr int o r e - mail autom atic ally th e next t im e y ou con ne ct the ca mer a to y o ur computer . Y ou ca n al so b ypas s the c om p u t er al together an d pr i nt the s ele cted pictur es direct l y to any HP D eskjet or Photosma rt printer s th at ar e U SB -enable d . Y ou can enhance yo ur e xper ience b y pur chasin g an HP Ph otosmart 8881 Camer a Dock. T he C amera Dock allow s y ou to easi ly do wnl oad im age s to a comp ute r , se nd imag es to a p r inte r or t ele vis io n, r ec har ge th e cam er a ba tter ie s, an d pr ovi de a con veni ent home for y our c amer a. NO TE A Doc k Inse r t is incl uded i n yo u r c a m e ra b ox. Th i s D o ck Ins ert enabl es yo u r c amer a (and other s of th e sa me mo del) t o u se t he HP C ame r a Doc k. P lea se d o not use it w ithou t the Ca mer a Do ck and DO NO T dis car d i t . Inst r uction s f or it s use ar e inc luded w ith t he C ame r a Do ck a s w ell as in App end ix B o f th is ma nual, s tar t i ng o n pa ge 9 5.
10 hp p ho tosmar t 850 user â s manual Camer a pa rts # Name Des cr ipti on 1N e c k s t r a p mount Allow s y ou to attach a ne ck strap (a mount is on each side of ca mer a) 2 P ow er/ Memory light Solid gr een âcamer a is on Blin king gr ee n â camer a is off and i s chargin g the bat teri es Blinki ng r e d âcame r a has insuf f ic ie nt pow er and is shutt ing dow n So li d ambe r âcame r a is r ea ding f r om or w r iting to the memo r y car d 3M e m o r y c a r d door Allow s access to ins e r t or r emov e th e memor y card 4 Men u/OK bu tto n Al lo w s y ou to disp la y the Captur e and Pl a yb a c k men us and t o sel ect menu o ptions 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Ch apter 1: G et ti ng s tar te d 1 1 5 Co nt r ol l er wi th a n d buttons Allow s you t o mov e through menu s an d imag es on th e Imag e Displa y , o r through t he Captur e me nu in t he vi ew fi n d e r m i cro d i s p l ay 6 Dis pla y button Tu r n s Live V iew on the Image D ispla y on and off 7 Pl ay button Tu r n s Pl a yb a c k on and of f 8 Shar e but ton Tu r n s t h e Shar e menu on and off 9 Ima ge D isplay Allow s y ou to f ram e pictur es an d vi d eo clip s u s ing Live V iew an d r e vi e w th em aft erw ar d in Pl ayb a c k , and to v ie w all the m enus 10 Ey e - start sens o r T u rns on th e micr o dis pla y i n the v ie wf inde r whe n it dete cts that y ou ar e loo king int o the vi e w f inde r 11 V ie w f inder with micr odi spla y Allow s you to fr am e pictures an d vi d eo clip s u s ing Live V iew , and to v ie w th e Captur e me nu 12 Di opte r con tr ol A dj usts the f oc us in th e mic r odispl a y . (I t does N O T af fect th e focu s of the imag e or v ide o cli p that you capture . ) 13 Fl a s h bu tton Se lec ts t he fl as h se tting w h en the pop - up flas h assem bly i s a cti vate d 14 Fo c u s but ton Tu r n s Macr o f ocu s on (for t aki ng c lose - up pictu r es ) and off 15 Z oom O u t button Z o oms out the len s to the w ide a ngl e posi tion 16 Z oom In button Z ooms in the lens t o th e te le ph ot o posi tion # Name Des cr ipti on
12 hp p ho tosmar t 850 user â s manual # Na me Des cr ipti on 1 Shu tter button T a k es a picture or starts and st ops re c o rd i n g a v id e o c l i p 2 OFF/Mode sele ctor T ur ns the came r a po w er o n an d off , an d se ts th e camer a mo de to St i ll , Self- Timer , or Vi d e o 3 S peak er P la y s came r a s ounds and a udi o c lips 4 P o p-up flas h re l e as e P ops up th e flash as sembly 5P o p - u p f l a s h as se m bly Pr o vi des ad dition al li ght t o im pr ov e pic t u r e - ta k i ng 2 3 4 5 1
Ch apter 1: G et ti ng s tar te d 1 3 # Name Des cr ipti on 1 Self-Timer light Blinks dur ing the 10 -second coun tdo wn be f or e taking a p ictu r e when u sing Sel f-T ime r mode. Al so tur ns on in l o w lig ht conditio ns to impr ov e auto focus. 2N e c k s t r a p mount Al lo w s y ou t o att ac h a n eck st r ap and a len s cap tether 3 USB co nnect or Al lo ws y ou t o connect a USB ca ble fr om the ca mer a to a USB -enabl ed comp uter o r pr int er 4 TV connecto r Al lo ws y ou to co nnect an opti o n al A udi o/Vi deo ca bl e fr om th e cam er a t o a T V 5 P ow er adapter connect or Al lo w s y ou t o connec t an opti onal H P A C po wer ad apter to the cam er a to oper a te the cam er a without batteri es 1 3 7 8 9 10 6 4 5 2
14 hp p ho tosmar t 850 user â s manual Setu p At tac hin g th e len s cap tet her 1 W ith the f r ont o f the cam er a fac ing y o u , in sert t he sm all lo op of the l ens cap te the r thr o ugh the ne c k str ap mo un t on t he r ight si de o f t he camer a . 2 Insert t he long lo op of the teth er t hr oug h the small loop and p ull to tig hten the k not . 3 Insert t he long lo op of the teth er through the len s c a p tether mount . 4 P ul l the long lo op o ver the si des of the lens cap a nd th en under the len s cap , as show n. P ull t o ti gh ten t he kno t. 6 Lens cap tether mount Allow s y ou to at tach a te ther to the lens cap 7 T ripo d moun t Allo w s you t o mount the camera t o a tripod 8 C ame r a Doc k connect or Allow s y ou to conn ect the c am e r a to the opt ional H P Ca mer a Do ck 9 B attery door Allow s access to ins ert and remo ve the b at teries 10 Micropho ne Reco r d s au dio c li ps # Name Des cr ipti on
Ch apter 1: G et ti ng s tar te d 1 5 At tac hin g th e nec k s tr ap Insert one end of the neck s tr ap t h rou g h a n ec k s t rap m o u nt. Th e n thread t he neck strap thr o ugh the plastic tab to s ecur e it. Repeat to attach the o th er end of the ne ck st r ap to t he othe r n eck strap mount . Insta lling t he bat teri es 1 W ith the f r on t o f the camer a f ac i ng you , op en the bat t er y door on the bot tom o f the cam era b y s lidi ng t he latch to t he r igh t an d pull ing the doo r to ward yo u . 2 I nsert the batte r ie s a s in dica ted insi de the d o o r . 3 Clo s e t he bat tery door by pushi ng t he door tow ar d the b ack o f th e c am er a a nd s lidi ng th e latch to the lef t . NO TE Fo r m o re i n f o rm a t i o n about b at t er ies, se e Mana ging batt er ie s on page 91 .
16 hp p ho tosmar t 850 user â s manual Insta lling t he memor y card 1 W ith the cam er a tur ned off and t he bac k o f th e ca mer a f ac ing y ou, open the me mo r y card door b y sl i d ing the door to the right . 2 Inse r t the memory card , ma king su r e th at it snaps into plac e. 3 Clo s e the memor y car d door . T o r emov e the memory c ar d, f irst mak e sur e t he c amer a i s turned of f . Ope n the memor y ca r d do or , then push th e memor y c ar d i n an d it will s p ri n g fro m t he c a m e ra. Tu r n i n g o n p ow e r T u rn the ca me r a o n b y rotat in g th e OFF/M o de sele ctor to th e mode yo u wa n t t o u s e : z â Still mode z â Self- Timer mod e z â Vid e o mode T he l en s e xte nds , t he Ima ge Di spl a y tu rns o n br ie fl y , an d th e P o w er/Memo r y l igh t turn s on s oli d gr een . NO TE If the P o wer/ Memor y light is bl inki ng red , t he bat ter ies ar e v ery lo w , and the c ame r a w ill sh ut do wn so on . Replace or r e char ge the ba tter ies, o r use a n optional HP A C ad apter to p o wer the c amera . F o r mor e i nfor mation about t he HP A C adapter , see Pu rch a s i n g c a m e ra acce sso r ies on page 9 3.
Ch apter 1: G et ti ng s tar te d 1 7 Cho os ing the langu age T h e f ir st time y ou tu r n t he came r a on , the fo llo w ing sc r e e n appea rs and pr ompt s y ou to choose a language. 1 Scr ol l to th e la ngu age th at you wan t by u s in g th e bu t to n s on the Contr o ller . 2 Pr ess t he blue Me n u/ O K b utton in the cen ter of the Contr o ller to sele ct the high lig hted langu age. Set ting t he da te and time The ca mer a has a clock that r ec or d s th e da te and ti me at which y ou ta ke eac h pi ctur e . T he f irst time y ou tur n t he came r a on , the follo wing screen appe ars a fter you choose the lang uage. 1 A dj ust the v alue o f the h ighli gh ted sele ction by using the buttons on the Contr o ller . 2 Pr es s th e bu t t ons o n the Contr ol ler to m ov e to the other se lections. R epea t st ep s one and tw o until the co rr ect date , time , a nd date/t im e f ormat ar e s et . NO TE In th e date/ti me format , mm =month , dd =da y , an d yyyy =year . 3 Pr ess t he Me n u/ OK bu tton wh en the pro per va lues a re ente red. The Image D isplay then turns off .
18 hp p ho tosmar t 850 user â s manual Insta lling t he soft w are T h e camer a s of t w ar e al lo w s y ou to unlo ad im ages f r om th e ca mer a , v ie w the m, p r int th em , an d e-m ail them . It also allo ws y ou to con f ig ur e t he Sha r e menu on the camer a. See Ch a p t er 4: Using hp instan t shar e on page 51 for in format ion abou t c onfig uring the Shar e menu on the ca mer a, and Chapt er 5: Unlo adi ng, pr i nting, and displ a y i ng im ages on page 5 9 f o r information about con necti ng t he ca mer a to a com puter o r pr i n te r . Win d o ws NO TE F or Window s c ompu ters , the HP Instant Shar e component of the HP Phot o & Im aging soft w a r e nee ds at least I nter net Explorer 5 .01 to function pr operly . 1 I nse rt the HP Pho t o & Ima ging so ft w ar e CD int o th e CD dri v e of your computer . Th e installat ion w indo w automatic ally appea rs . NO TE If the inst allati on w ind o w does no t a ppear , cli ck St ar t , and then click Ru n . T ype X:\S et up .e x e , wher e X is th e le tter o f y our CD dr i ve . 2 Cli ck Ne xt , an d th en f ollo w the on-sc r een ins tr uc tion s to in stal l the soft war e . Y our CD may also include b onu s soft w are f r om other manufacturer s. T o inst all a n y bonus soft war e : 1 Cli ck St ar t , c li ck Run , and in th e Open bo x , type X:\Bonus\setup .e xe (where X i s the let ter o f y our CD dr i ve) . 2 Cli ck OK , a nd th en fol lo w the on -s cr e en i nst ruct ions to in stal l the bonus soft war e.
Ch apter 1: G et ti ng s tar te d 1 9 Mac intosh 1 I nser t the H P Phot o & Ima ging so ft w ar e CD int o the CD dri v e of y our computer . 2 Double - click th e C D icon on th e com puter de sk top . 3 Do uble -cl i ck the inst aller i con, a n d t hen f o llo w the on-s cr een in struction s to in stal l the sof t w a r e . Y our CD may also include b onu s soft w are f r om other manufacturer s. T o inst all a n y bonus sof twar e : 1 Do ubl e -c li c k th e Bonu s fol d er i co n. 2 Double- clic k the ins taller icon for the bo n us soft war e. 3 F o llow the on- sc r een i nst r uctions to i nstall the soft w ar e. Camer a stat e s and menu s Y our c amer a has th r ee main st ates that allow yo u t o complete cer t a in t asks. E ach of th ese st ates has an assoc iated menu y ou can u se to adj ust came r a se tting s or perf or m ta sks in t hat st ate . z Captur e âA llows yo u to take still pictu res and r ecor d vi deo clip s . F or inf or mati on on u s in g Captur e , s ee Chapter 2 : T a k ing pi ctur es and r ecor d ing vi deo c lips on page 21 . z Pl ayb a ck â Allo ws y o u to r ev i e w th e stil l ima ges an d v ideo cli ps that you c aptu r e . For in f o r m ation on usi ng Playback , see Ch a pter 3: R ev ie w ing im ages a nd v ide o clip s on page 43. z Shar e âAll o ws y ou to u se the HP Ins tan t Shar e tec hnolog y t o sele ct image s in the camer a that w ill be au to mati call y pr o cess ed later wh en th e ca mera is c onn ecte d to your computer o r to a U SB -enable d HP pr i n ter . F or infor ma tion on using Shar e , see Chapt er 4: Usi ng hp instan t sha r e on page 51 .
Ch apter 1: G et ti ng s tar te d 2 0 Y our came r a also has a fourth m enu, the Setup m enu, which all ows y ou to ad j ust a n um ber of ca mer a s etti ngs. F or inf or mati on on using the Setup men u , see Chapter 6: Adjustin g the c a m e ra se ttings on page 63. R es toring p re vious set tin g s S om e of th e se t t i ngs t ha t you ca n cha n g e in t h e c a m era me nu s do not r emain s et a fter y o u tur n the camer a of f . Ho w e v er , y ou can r estor e the set ti n gs fr om the last ti me th e camera w as on and ha d at least on e non- default set tin g (which cou ld actual ly be se v er al po we r c yc le s ago ) b y hol ding do wn th e bl ue Me n u/ OK bu t t on whil e r ota ting th e OFF/M ode s el ecto r t o tur n the camer a on .
Ch apter 2: T a k in g pictu r es a nd rec ordi ng video cli ps 2 1 C hapter 2 : T akin g p ic tur es an d reco rdin g vi d eo c l ips Usi ng th e dis pl a y s Y our came r a h as t w o d isp la y s: z Mi cr odispla y in the v ie wfind er âAllow s you to f rame p ic tur es and v ide o c lips us in g Live View , and t o v ie w the Captur e me nu z Image Display âA ll ow s y ou t o f r ame p i ct ur es an d v id eo clip s using Live View , r ev iew images and video cl ips i n Pl ayb a ck , and to v ie w al l the men us NO TE Using th e Image Disp la y consume s a lot of ba ttery pow er . T o pr eser v e b at ter ies, use the micr od isplay in stead. T o ac tiv ate Live View on the: z Micr od is play , s im ply look thr oug h the v iewfinder . The e ye -star t sen sor belo w t he vie w finder de tects that you ar e loo k ing thr ough the v ie w f inder and au tomati call y turns o n the m ic r o dis play . z Image Display , pr es s the Disp la y button. NO TE If the mic r odisp la y d o es no t tur n on a ut omati call y whe n y ou look th r ough the v ie w f inder , y ou may nee d to cha nge the Eye - Sta rt se t ting in t he Setup menu . Se e Eye - St ar t on pa ge 66. T o adjust th e focu s i n th e micr o di splay , se e U sing the dio pte r contr ol on page 2 3.
2 2 hp phot osma r t 850 userâs m anu al The follo wing tabl e describes th e information th at is disp la y e d in th e Live Vi ew scr e en o f the activ e dis pla y when the c amer a sett ings ar e at their default values. # Ico n Descr ipt ion 1 12 R emaining p ictur es coun t or v ideo c lip r ecor ding time (de pend s on ho w m uc h space is r emaining on the memory car d) 2 4 MP Re sol ut ion setting (defau lt is 4 M P - 2272 x 1712 pi x els) and Compression setting (default is Better , which is indicated by the two star s) 3 or âBattery leve l when u sing batteries (actua l icon shown depe nds on th e state of y our camera ba tte ries ) âA C po w er when using the optional H P A C a da pte r o r C ame r a D ock 4 or â Flash Off when the pop- up fl ash is not activated â Auto (default fla sh se tting) when the po p-u p fla sh is activ ate d 5 F o cu s br ackets ( see Usi ng t he focu s brack ets on page 25) 1 2 4 5 3 A A
Ch apter 2: T a k in g pictu r es a nd rec ordi ng video cli ps 2 3 NO TE If you change other camera se tting s in the Capt ure menu , icons for those settings w ill als o be display ed across the top and b ottom of the Live View sc reen . For more information, see U sing the ca pture menu on pag e 34 . Usin g th e dio pter control Th e rubber e ye piece on t he v ie w f inder i s a di opter c on tr ol t hat y ou can tu rn to adj u st the foc us in the mi cr odispl ay . Ho w ev er , th e dio pter con tr ol ha s NO eff e c t on the ac tual p ictur e y ou t ak e or v ide o c li p y ou r e cor d. T akin g sti ll p ic tures You can take a picture a lmost an y time th e cam era is on, reg ardless of what is be in g shown on th e active display. Your came r a has two mo des for ta king still pictures : Still mode an d Sel f - T imer mode . Using still mode 1 R o ta te the OFF/Mode sel ect or to Still mode . 2 F rame the su bject for you r pi cture in the acti ve displ ay. 3 H ol d t he cam er a st ead y an d pr ess the Shu t t er butt on h al f way d own. Th e c a m e r a measu r es a nd then locks t he f oc u s and e xpo sur e. 4 Pr ess the Sh utter b utto n a ll the w ay down to tak e the picture . T he imag e is dis pla y e d fo r s ev er al seco nds in Ins tan t R e vi e w on the act i v e dis pl a y . Se e Using insta nt r e vi ew on pag e 2 5.
2 4 hp phot osma r t 850 userâs m anu al Using s elf- timer mode In Se lf-Ti mer mode, the camera ta kes the picture 10 se conds after you press the Sh utter b utton all the way down. 1 Secure th e ca m era to a tripod or set it o n a s tab le su rf ace. 2 R o ta te the OFF/Mode selecto r to Self- Timer mode . 3 Frame t he s ubjec t for you r pic ture in the active displa y. 4 P ress th e Shutte r bu tto n halfw a y dow n. The ca mer a m easures and th en locks the fo c us an d e xposu r e . The camer a wi ll hold the se setting s f or the 10 se cond s u ntil it ta k e s th e pict ur e. NO TE If you imme diate l y press the Shu tte r b utton all the way down instead, the camera lo cks focus and exposure just bef ore the en d of th e 10- seco nd co untd own. T his is use ful when o ne or more su bject s wil l be en terin g the p ict ure during the 10-se cond coun tdown period. 5 Pr ess th e Shu t te r butt on a ll the w a y do wn . A 10-secon d coun tdo wn ap pears on th e ac tiv e displa y . Th e Self - Tim er light on the fr ont of the ca mer a bl inks slo wly f or 7 sec onds an d th e n qu ic k ly fo r t he fi na l 3 se c on d s b efo r e th e ca m era ta k es the pictu r e. A fte r t he p i c tur e is t ak en , t h e im ag e is di sp la y ed f o r se v er al se conds in Ins ta nt R e vi e w o n the a cti v e d ispla y . See Us in g instan t r e vi ew on p age 25 .
Ch apter 2: T a k in g pictu r es a nd rec ordi ng video cli ps 25 Using ins tant r e vie w After y ou ta k e a st il l pi c tur e, the act i ve dis pla y s ho ws the i mage f or se v er a l secon ds in Ins ta nt R e v i e w w hile t he im a ge is being sa v e d to th e m em ory car d. Y ou ca n dele te t he imag e dur ing Instant R ev ie w b y pr essi ng th e Men u/OK bu tto n . Yo u c a n e x t e n d Ins t ant R e v ie w by h o l d i n g d ow n t h e Shutte r bu tto n afte r y ou t ak e the p ictu r e . Y ou ca n also se t ho w l ong Instant R ev ie w is di splay e d or turn it off with the Instant R e vi ew option in the Setup m enu . F or mor e i nfor m ation , see Ins t ant revi e w on pag e 6 5. Yo u c a n a l s o u s e Pl ayb a c k to r evie w the im age s you h ave ta k en. S ee U sing pla yba c k on pa ge 4 3. Using t he f oc us b rac k ets The t w o br ackets in the midd le of the a ctiv e d ispl a y scr e en sh ow th e f oc u s r e g io n f or t he pi ctur e y ou ar e t aki ng or t he vi d e o c l i p yo u a re re c o rd i n g. W h e n yo u p re s s t h e Shutter button h alf w ay do wn , th e cam er a m easur es an d then lock s the f oc u s us ing t his r egi on . T he f oc us b r ac ke ts tur n gr een w he n the ima ge is in f oc us and th e camer a can loc k t he foc us , b ut tur n r e d when th e c amer a i s u nable to focu s. If the f ocu s br ack ets turn r ed , r el ease t he S h utter b u tto n , r e -fr ame the subject f or your pic tu r e or v ideo cli p , and then pr ess the Shu t t er b u t to n h a l f way d own a g ai n . I f th e fo cu s br ack ets contin ue t o tur n r ed afte r se v er al tr ie s, t he li ghting ma y be t oo lo w , or t her e m a y not be en oug h co n tr ast in t he f oc us r e gi on . T ry u s ing Fo c u s L o c k . See Using f o c us l ock on page 2 6.
2 6 hp phot osma r t 850 userâs m anu al If t he focus br ack et s turn r e d and the Ma cr o ico n is blinking on th e act i ve d isplay , either the ca m er a is set to Ma c r o fo cus but d etec ts th e focus is f urt her a wa y tha n the macr o (close - up) ra n g e, o r th e c a m e ra i s s e t t o Nor mal f ocu s bu t de tects the foc us is c los e r t h an t he n o rma l ran ge. For mo r e i nfo rma t ion on the f o c us sett ings an d th eir r espe ctiv e di stanc e ranges, se e Using the f ocu s settings on p age 2 7. NO TE Wh en s et to Mac r o focus, the ca mera will not tak e a p ic tur e if it c ann ot f ind f oc us . Ho we ve r , w hen set t o Nor m a l f oc u s (th e de f aul t) , t he came r a w ill s till t ak e a p ic tur e if it ca nnot f ind f oc us . Using f o cus loc k Fo c u s L o c k all ow s y ou t o f oc us o n a su b jec t th at is n ot in t he center of the picture , or to capt ur e action s hots mor e quickl y by pr e-f oc u sing in the ar ea w her e ac ti on w ill o cc ur . Y ou can als o use Fo cu s L o c k t o he lp a chi e v e f oc us in l o w li ghti n g or lo w con tr as t situ atio ns. 1 F r a me the s u bject f or y ou r p ictu r e within the foc us br ack et s in th e a cti ve displ a y . 2 Press the Shu t t er b u t to n h a l f way d own to l o ck t he exp o s ure and f o c us. 3 Cont inu e to ho ld th e Shutter but ton hal fwa y do wn whi le you r e -fr a me or adju st y our subject f or pr oper posi tioning . 4 Pr ess t he Shutter but ton a ll t he way down to ta k e the pictu r e .
Ch apter 2: T a k in g pictu r es a nd rec ordi ng video cli ps 2 7 Using t he f oc us s et ting s Yo u c a n u s e t h e Ma c r o fo cus se tting on the camer a f or t aking close - up pi ctures. The Fo c u s butt on le ts y ou t oggle bet ween t he Nor mal and Ma c r o f ocu s setting s. Nor mal is t he de f au lt f ocu s se t ting on the camer a . NO TE If t he came r a is z oomed in pa st 3 . 5x w hen y ou s et t he camer a to Ma c r o f oc u s, t he ca mer a w ill a ut oma ti ca ll y z oom bac k t o 3 .5x . Se e Usi ng zoo m on pa ge 3 3 . NO TE Wh en s et to Mac r o focus, the ca mera will not tak e a pict u re i f it c a n no t fi n d fo cus ( th e fo cus b r ac k e t s tu rn r e d i n t he cen t er of t he acti ve disp la y) . Ho w e ve r , w hen s et t o Nor m a l f oc us , t he came r a wil l still t ak e a pi ctur e if it canno t f ind f o c u s. Ico n Setting Desc rip tion None No r mal Use when t aki ng pi ctu r es of s u bjects greater than 0.8 m (31.5 inches) awa y . A uto fo cu s is lim it ed t o a d ist anc e r ang e o f 0. 8 m (31 . 5 in c he s) t o inf in ity . Mac r o Use when taking close- u p pic tu r es of subj e cts less than 0.8 m ( 31. 5 inches) aw a y . Auto foc us i s lim ite d to a di stan ce range of 0.1 - 0.8 m ( 4 - 31.5 inches) , and z oom po si ti on is li mi ted to a range of 1 x to 3 .5 x .
28 h p p hotos mar t 850 userâ s ma nua l Using e xpo sur e com pensa tion In difficul t lighting conditions, yo u can us e Exposure Comp ens at ion to override the automatic exposure setting that the cam era makes . Exposu re Com p en sation settings ra nge fr om -3.0 EV (E xposu re Va lue) to re duce t he exp osur e of t he imag e (darke ning it), to 3.0 EV to increase the ex posure o f the i mage ( brigh tening it) . By default, Exposure C ompensation is set t o 0 ( zero ) an d n o in dica tion is given o n the active d isplay. When Live View is turn ed on and y ou press the buttons on th e Cont r ol ler , a m e te r appears in t h e midd le of th e act iv e di spl ay, an d t he Exposure Comp ens at ion va lue i s sh own on the bottom of the display. When yo u ha ve not c hanged Exposu re Com pensation fo r 2 s e co nds, the mete r disa ppears, but the value remains at the bottom of th e screen flanked by arro ws (unle ss it has been set to 0).
Ch apter 2: T a k in g pictu r es a nd rec ordi ng video cli ps 29 Using th e pop-u p f la sh NO TE Y ou cann ot us e the f lash w hile r e co r ding v ideo c l ips . The flas h o n you r c a mera i s tu rne d o ff and th e fl as h w ill not f ir e un til y ou man uall y pop it up b y sl idin g the pop-u p f l a sh r e lease on top of the c amer a. When the f lash is poppe d -up , it begi ns to charge and is autom atica lly set to the Au to fla s h s etting . T o ch ange th e f l a s h set ti ng , pr ess the Fl a s h bu t ton on t he b ac k of the came r a unti l th e desi r e d set ti ng appe ars on the a cti ve di splay . The follo wing tabl e describes the dif f eren t flash set tings. NO TE If y ou c han ge th e fl ash settin g , t he c ame r a w ill r ema in in th at s etting un til y ou c hang e it or tur n off the ca mer a . Ic on Setting Desc rip tion Au to The camera me asures lig ht and uses the flash if n ecessary . Au to wi th Re d -eye Re d uct i on The camera me a s ur es light and uses the f l a s h wi t h re d - ey e red u c t i o n i f n e c e s s a r y . A A
Ch apter 2: T a k in g pictu r es a nd rec ordi ng video cli ps 3 0 NO TE Only the Fl a s h O n setting is a va ila ble w hen y ou se t th e Exposur e Mode in the Captu r e men u t o e ithe r Ap er t u re Pr ior it y or Shutter P r ior it y . Se e Expo sur e mode on page 35. T o tu r n t he f lash off , pr ess t he po p-up flash assemb ly do wn until it sna ps sh ut . W hen the f lash is o ff , the Fl a s h O f f ico n appe ars at th e top of th e Live V iew sc r een . Fl a s h O n Th e came ra always flas hes. If the li ght is be hind your sub ject, yo u can use th is setting to increase the light o n the front of your subject. (This is called âf ill-flash.â) Night The camera fires the flash to illuminate objects in the foreground. It th e n contin ues to expos e as if th e flas h h a d not fired to ga ther the backgr ound. Night w ith Re d -eye Re d uct i on T he camera f ires the fl ash, using re d-eye reduction if necessary, to illuminate objects in the foreground. It th e n contin ues to expos e as if th e flas h h a d not fired to ga ther the backgr ound. Ic on Setting Desc rip tion
Ch apter 2: T a k in g pictu r es a nd rec ordi ng video cli ps 3 1 Recordin g au dio Y ou can set t he camer a to a ut omati call y r ecor d audi o clip s that ar e at tached to the sti ll pi ct ures y ou ta k e. An audio cli p c an b e a max imum of 30 sec onds long . 1 Set Au d io Rec o rd to On in the Set u p men u . ( Se e Usi ng t he setup m enu on p age 6 3 .) 2 Pr ess t he Shu t t er but ton h alf w ay do wn to be gin audio r eco r ding (f oc us an d e xposu r e als o l oc k) . A mi cr oph o n e and aud io counter app e ar at the top of the act i ve di splay . 3 Pr ess t he Shutter but ton a ll t he way down to ta k e the pictu r e . 4 Co nti nue to ho ld the Shutte r button do wn to r e cord the audio cli p , then r ele ase the Shut te r b utton to st op r ecor ding . Audi o r e cord in g stops either when you r elease the Sh utter button, Instant Re vi e w en ds, the maximum audio clip length o f 30 sec ond s is r eac hed , o r t he me mory ca r d is f ull , wh ic he v er come s fir st . Y o u can u se Pla yb a c k to r ev iew the audio cli ps you h av e re c o rd e d. S e e Using pla ybac k on page 43 .
Ch apter 2: T a k in g pictu r es a nd rec ordi ng video cli ps 3 2 Record ing vi deo c lip s A v i de o clip in clu de s aud io an d can be a max im um o f 60 se c ond s l o ng . 1 R o tate th e OFF/Mod e sel ector to Vid e o mode. 2 F r a me the s u bject for y ou r v ideo in th e a cti ve displ a y . 3 Pres s the Shutter bu t t on ha lfw a y do w n . T he ca mer a me asu r es an d then locks t he foc us. NO TE Un like sti ll pictures, exposu r e is n ot lock ed for a video cli p wh en you pr ess t he Shu t t er but ton half w ay do wn. Ins tead , e xp osur e i s conti nual l y measu r ed a nd ad j uste d d u ri n g v id e o re c o rd i n g . 4 Pr ess t he Shu t t er bu t t on all the w a y do wn an d r ele ase it t o s ta r t re c o rd i n g vi d e o. REC an d the v i deo coun te r appe ar a t the top of th e act i ve d isplay . 5 Pr es s the Shutter bu t t on all the w ay do wn ag ain to st op re c o rd i n g vid e o. Th e camera au to matically stops r ecording whe n th e max i mum vid eo cl ip l en g t h o f 6 0 se c o nd s i s r e a ch e d o r t h e m em or y c ard is f u ll , whiche ver comes f i r st . After r e cording h as stopped, th e f irst f r ame of th e v i deo clip an d Pr oc es sing ... ap p e a r on th e activ e display . Wh ile i t is pr o cess ing, y ou ca n delet e the video c l i p by p r e s s i n g t h e Menu/ OK but t on. Y ou can use Pl ayb a ck to r e vi e w the v ide o c lip s y ou ha v e tak en . See Usi ng pl a yb ack on page 43. NO TE Moto r no ise f r om opti cal z ooming m ay b e r ecor ded in the audio por tion of a vide o clip . T h u s, for best audio qu alit y , do no t u se t he z oom w hile r ecor ding v i deo .
Ch apter 2: T a k in g pictu r es a nd rec ordi ng video cli ps 33 Usi n g zoo m O ptical zoom Pr ess t he Zo o m O u t and Zoom In but tons to mo ve t he lens bet ween w ide a ngle and telephoto po sition s (1 x to 8x) . NO TE If you set the c am er a to Mac r o fo cus , you c an o n ly zo o m t o 3 .5 x. Dig ital z oom NO TE Y ou ca nn ot use digi t al z o om while recor ding vi d e o c l i p s . 1 Pr ess t he Z oom in button t o optically z o om in to the max imum level , then release the but ton . 2 Press the Zoo m i n but ton ag ain and hold it u n ti l you reach the de sir ed si z e in t he ac ti ve displ ay . A re d b o rd er s u rro u n d s t h e a re a of the ima ge th at will be captu r ed. The Res ol u t io n nu mbe r in t he upper -left c or ner of the s cr e en als o becom es small er as y ou di gita ll y z oom . F or e x ampl e , 2. 3 app ears in pl ace of 4 MP , indica ting t hat t he imag e is being cr op pe d do wn to a si ze of 2 .3 M egapi x e ls. 3 M a ke s u re t h e re d b o rd er f ram e s yo u r s u bj e c t, a nd t h e n pr ess the Shu t t er but ton to take th e pi c tu r e. T o tu r n digi tal z o om off and return to optical z o om , press the Zo o m O u t but ton until d i gita l z oom ing stops. R ele ase the button, and then pr ess the but ton aga in .
Ch apter 2: T a k in g pictu r es a nd rec ordi ng video cli ps 34 Usin g th e ca pture menu The Capt ure men u allow s you to adjust vari ous cam er a sett ings t hat aff ect th e q ualiti es o f the imag es an d v i deo cl ips y ou cap tur e w ith y our came r a , such as th e ir e xpo sur e , colo r , an d re s ol u t io n . NO TE Y our cam er a can be in a n y mode ( Sti l l , Self- Timer , or Vid e o ) wh en u sing t he Captu r e menu options, but some menu opt ions w i ll b e g r ay e d-out when in Vid e o mo de . 1 To d i s p l a y t h e Capture men u , pr ess th e Menu / OK bu t t on at an y time w hen the Ima ge Disp la y is tur ned off , or whe n Live Vie w is tur ned o n in t he ac ti ve displ ay . 2 Us e the butto ns on th e Co nt r o l ler to scr ol l through t he Capture menu options. 3 E ither press the Me n u/ OK but ton to selec t a high lighted option and displ a y its s u b- menu , or use the but tons on the Contr oller to cha nge the setting for the highlighted option without go ing to its sub-menu . 4 W ithin a su b-men u , u se t he b u tton s on th e Contr ol ler an d the Me n u /OK bu t t on t o c han ge t he se tting f or the Capt ur e menu opt ion . 5 To e x i t t h e Capt ur e men u , highl ight the EXIT CAPTURE MENU opt i o n a nd press the Men u/ OK button. Scr een one Scr een t w o
Ch apter 2: T a k in g pictu r es a nd rec ordi ng video cli ps 35 Exposure mod e Thi s Captu re men u opt i on allow s you to ov err ide th e autom at i c exp osu r e se ttings o n the came r a. T he Exp os ur e Mode setting d ete rmines ho w the camer a se l e cts t he aper tur e a nd shu t ter s pee d f or the giv en scene br igh tne ss. The defau l t Expo sur e Mod e setting is Au to . T he Expo sur e Mode se tting r ese ts to Au to w he n y ou tu r n t he came r a off . When y o u set Ex p osur e Mode to Action , Lands cape , or Po r t r a i t , th e IS O S pe ed menu option is gr ay ed -out . Ico n Setting Description None Aut o Cam e ra automat ically selec ts a n aper tur e an d sh utte r sp eed Act i on Ca m era bi a se s t owa rd fa s t e r s h u t t e r spee ds and higher ISO spe eds to stop action Lan dsc ape Ca m e ra bi a s es t owa rd s m a l l er ap e r t u re s and lo wer ISO sp eed s for bet ter dept h o f f oc us and q uality Po r t r a i t Ca m e ra bi a s e s t owa rd wi d e r ap e r t u re s t o blu r th e bac k gr ou nd an d u se s lo w er contr ast fo r pr ofessional-lo o ki ng portraits Av Aper tu r e Pr i o r ity Y ou select a specif ic apert ure v alu e in Live View , then t he came r a sel ects th e appr opri ate shutter sp eed Tv Shutter Pr i o r ity Y ou sele ct a sp ecific shut ter sp eed i n Live View , then t he came r a sel ects th e appr op r iate apert ur e value
Ch apter 2: T a k in g pictu r es a nd rec ordi ng video cli ps 36 When y o u set Ex p osur e Mode to Ap e r t u re P ri o ri t y or S h utter Pr ior it y , the F-number and sh ut ter spee d ar e di splay ed in Live Vie w , and y ou can u se the b uttons on the Co nt r o l le r to ad j u st th e valu es. White balan ce In som e cases, i t ma y be necess ar y to pr e - set the l igh t sou r ce s o the camer a can r epr oduce colo r s mor e accurately . Thi s Capture menu opt i on determ i nes h o w the c am er a w i l l adju st t he color of the ima ge to match the s cen e il lu min a nce. Set the Whi te B al an ce acco r ding t o the situat io ns e xplain ed in the f ol lo wing table . The default Wh ite Ba lanc e setting is Auto . The Whit e Ba lan ce sett ing resets to Aut o w he n y ou tur n t he camer a off . Icon Setting Des cr ipti on None A uto Ca m e r a automa tically identifies and cor rects for s cene ill uminanc e Sun Camera bala nces c olor as suming it is outdoor s under sun or br ight c loud y conditi ons Shade Camera bala nces c olor as suming it is outdoors in shad e , t w ilig h t , or dark clou dy co ndi tion s Tu n g s t e n Camera bala nces c olor as suming incandescen t or halogen li g h ting (typ i call y f oun d in hom es)
Ch apter 2: T a k in g pictu r es a nd rec ordi ng video cli ps 3 7 The Man ual W hite Balan ce scr een d i s p l a y s w h e n y o u s e l e c t t h e Manu al se tting . The Live V iew por ti on o f the scr een sh o ws the c olor tint fr om the pr ev ious Ma n u a l W hi te Ba l an ce se tting that w as m ade . NO TE To r e s t o r e t h e p r e v i o u s Ma n ua l W hi te Ba la nc e se tting , sim ply pr ess the Men u/OK but t on in th e M an ual Whit e Balance scr e en wi thout pr ess ing the Sh utter button. To c h a n g e t h e Ma nu a l Whi te B ala nce se tting , po int t he came r a at a whi te tar get , and then pr ess t he Shutter butto n (th e came r a wi l l n ot t a k e a pi c tu re) . T h e camer a th en cal c ulate s a c us tom Whit e Balance set ti n g based on the region ins i d e the f o c us brac kets. When the calc ulation is comp lete , the col or tin t in Li v e View ch ange s t o match the new Man ua l Whit e Ba lan ce setting . Y ou can r epeat this mu ltipl e times until y ou get the de sir ed Whi te B ala nce . When y ou a r e sat isfied w ith the Manu al set ti ng y ou hav e ma de , pr ess the Men u/OK butt on to e x i t th e Man u al Whi te B ala nce s cre e n a n d re t u rn t o t h e Captur e menu . Fl u o re s c e n t Camera bala nces c olor as suming f l uo r escen t li ghting Man ual Came r a ca lc u lates a custom Wh i te Balance base d on y our t ar ge t imag e (see th e f oll ow ing i nf or ma tio n) Icon Setting Des cr ipti on
Ch apter 2: T a k in g pictu r es a nd rec ordi ng video cli ps 38 AE m etering Thi s Capt ure me nu op ti on deter m ines which r e gion of the p ic tur e w ill be u sed to mea sur e the expos ure . The defau l t AE Me ter ing setting is Center - W eighted . The AE Mete rin g se tting r ese ts to Cente r - W ei g hted w hen y ou t ur n the ca mer a off . Icon Setting Des cr ipti on Ave ra g e Camera uses t he enti r e s cene r e gion to m easure a nd c alculate ex po s ure None Center - W ei g hted Camera uses l ar g e a r e a i n t h e ce n ter of the scene r eg ion t o me asur e and ca lc u late e x posu r e Sp ot Camera uses a smal l area in t he ce n ter of the scene r eg ion t o me asur e and ca lc u late e x posu r e
Ch apter 2: T a k in g pictu r es a nd rec ordi ng video cli ps 39 I S O s peed Thi s Captu re men u opt i on allow s you to adjust the sen sit i vit y of th e camera to l ight. Because higher IS O n u mbers allow higher shutter speed s, u se a high er IS O Speed setting when tak ing pi ctu r es i n dark ar e as or p ic tur es of fast mov i ng ob je cts. In c ontr ast , be cause lower ISO numb ers r es u l t in sl o w er sh utte r speeds , u se a l ow er ISO Sp e ed setting to capt ur e b ett er qual ity images w ith less â n o i se . â NO TE Y ou m a y wan t to use a tr ipod whe n setting the came r a to I S0 100 beca us e of the r esu ltin g slo w sh utter spe e d . The defau l t I S O Sp eed s et tin g is AU TO , wh ic h a l lows th e cam era to pic k the b est IS O Speed f or th e scene. The IS O Sp ee d setting r es ets t o AU T O wh en y o u turn the camera off . When y o u set Ex p osur e Mode to Action , Lands cape , or Po r t r a i t , th e IS O S pe ed menu option is gr ay ed -out , a nd the camer a au tomati call y sele cts th e best I S O S peed sett ing . Colo r Thi s Captu re men u opt i on allow s you to s et th e color in which yo ur i ma ges w il l be c aptur ed. The def aul t Co lo r setting is F ull C ol or . The Co lo r setting r esets t o F ull C olo r w hen y ou t ur n the ca mer a off .
Ch apter 2: T a k in g pictu r es a nd rec ordi ng video cli ps 4 0 Res o lu ti o n Thi s Capt ure me nu op tio n allo w s y ou to se t the r esoluti on (numbe r of p i xe ls) a t whi ch y ou r imag es w ill be ca ptur ed . The defau l t Res o lu t io n se t ting is 4MP - 22 7 2 x 1712 . T he Re so l ut io n se t tin g r emains se t wh en yo u t u rn t h e c a m e r a o f f. NO TE Th e Re s o l u t i o n set tin g automatica lly c ha nges whe n y ou ar e usi n g digi tal z o om. A t the de fa ult 4MP - 22 7 2 x 17 12 pi xels (4 Me gapi x e ls) se tting , the ca ptur ed ima ge wil l b e f ull si z e. At th e 1M P - 1 13 6 x 8 4 8 p ix el s (1 Megapix el) set t i ng , t h e image will be 1/4 s i ze . NO TE Th e Re s o l u t i o n setting aff ects th e n umb er o f im age s th at can be saved on y our me mory car d. Fe wer i mages will be sa v ed o n th e mem ory c ar d at t he d ef au lt , hi ghe r Re so l ut io n se tting of 4MP - 2 27 2 x 1 712 than at the lo wer Re so l ut io n se tting of 1 MP - 11 3 6 x 848 . S ee Me mo ry car d ca pac it y on page 102. Compr ess io n Thi s Captu re men u opt i on allow s you to set how much J P EG c ompressio n y ou r image s w ill h av e . T he came r a h as t h re e c o m p res s i o n s e t t i n gs : Best , Better , a nd Good .
Ch apter 2: T a k in g pictu r es a nd rec ordi ng video cli ps 4 1 The defau l t Compr es si o n setting is Better . T he Com pr essi on se tting r emains se t whe n yo u turn the camer a of f . NO TE Th e Compr ess ion se t ting af fec ts the n umber o f imag es t ha t can be sa ve d o n y our mem ory car d . F e we r imag es w il l be saved on th e memor y c ar d at th e Best setting than at t he defa u lt Better se t t i ng. S im i la rly , fewer i m ag es wi l l b e sav e d at the def ault Better set tin g than at the Good se tting . S ee Memo ry car d ca pac it y on page 102. Setup Selec ting this Cap tur e menu opt ion d isplay s the Setup men u . F o r information about the Setup m enu , se e Chapt er 6: A dju sting t he came r a se ttings on page 63. Icon Setting Des cr ipti on Best This setting pro d uces the highes t-qual ity image s, but u ses th e mo st memory . This is reco mmen ded if yo u plan to en lar ge images, o r prin t images to a size larger than 18 by 24 cm (or 8 b y 10 inches). Better This setting pro d uces high-quality images and requir es le ss memory th an the Bes t setting. This is recommended for printing imag es up to 18 by 24 cm (o r 8 by 10 inches). Good This is the mo st memory-efficient setting , ideal for ima ges that you want to e-mail or post to the I nternet.
Ch apter 2: T a k in g pictu r es a nd rec ordi ng video cli ps 4 2
Cha pter 3: R ev ie wi ng images and v ide o clip s 43 C hapter 3 : Re vi e win g ima g es a nd vi d e o c l i ps Usi n g pl ay ba c k After you hav e tak en some p ict ur es or v ideo clips, yo u can u se Pl ayb a ck to r evie w t hem. NO TE Y our cam er a can be in a n y mode ( Sti l l , Self- Timer , or Vi de o ) whe n us ing Play b a ck to r eview imag es or vi d e o c l i p s . 1 Pr ess t he Pl ay button to act i vate Pl ayb a ck . T he m ost r ecent l y ta k e n or vi e wed image or vi deo clip appea r s on the Image D isplay . 2 Use th e but tons on the Contr ol ler to scrol l th r o ug h y o ur im ages and video cli ps. Pr es s and h old the or a rrow t o s c ro l l au t o m a t i c a l l y . NO TE Y ou only se e t he f i r s t fr am e of each video cli p , which is in dica ted b y t he Vide o ic on . Y o u can u se the Pl ay option in the Pl a yb a c k men u to pla y v ideo or audio cl ips. See Usin g the pl a yba ck menu o n pa ge 4 5. 3 T o tu r n th e Ima ge D ispl a y o ff aft er r e vi e w ing y our imag es and vide o clips, press the Pl ay bu t t on ag ain. In a dditio n to see ing the imag es or t he f ir st f r ame s o f v id eo cli ps on the Image Dis pla y , som e i nf ormation about each ima ge or v id eo clip is als o dis pl ay ed in Play b a ck . T he follo wing table describes the i nfor mation t h at you may see disp la y ed for ea ch ima g e or v id eo clip while in Pl ayb a ck .
4 4 hp p hotos mar t 850 userâ s ma nua l # Ico n Des cr ipti on 1 or âBattery leve l when using batteries (act ual icon shown depen ds o n th e state of your camera batteries) âA C pow er when using t he optional HP A C adapt e r or Ca mer a Do c k 2 D i sp lays for th e fi r s t few se co n d s to i nd i ca te that you can scr ol l thr oug h othe r images or vide o cl i ps 3 or âI ndic ates im age has an audio cli p âIn dicat es a v ideo cli p 4 5 o f 14 T he c ur r ent i ma ge n umbe r o f th e t ot al nu mber of ima ges on the memor y ca r d 1 2 3 4
Cha pter 3: R ev ie wi ng images and v ide o clip s 4 5 Usi ng th e p l a yba c k m en u The Play b a ck me nu allo w s y ou t o pl a y a udio and v id eo clip s, delete i mages and video cl ips or f ormat the me mo r y c ar d, and ma gnify an image on the Image Disp lay . F r om t he Playba ck menu , you ca n also a ccess the Se tu p m enu to se t a n umbe r of prefere nc e s o n th e c a me ra. NO TE Y our cam er a can be in a n y mode ( Sti l l , Self- Timer , or Vid e o ) wh en u sing t he Pl ayb a c k me n u options. 1 To d i s p l a y t h e Pl ayb a ck me n u , pr ess th e Me n u/ OK button w h il e yo u ar e in Pla yb a ck . I f y o u a r e not currentl y in Pl ayb a ck , pr ess th e Pl ay but ton f irst , then pr es s the Men u/OK but ton . 2 Use th e but tons on the Contr ol ler to m ov e to the imag e or v ideo cl ip you w a nt to use . 3 Us e the bu ttons on the Controller , to hi ghli gh t the menu options on the left of the Ima ge Displ a y . S elect a hig h l igh ted opti on b y p r essing t he Men u/ OK butt on . NO TE Wh il e a Pla yb a ck menu option i s selected , yo u can use th e butto ns o n th e Cont rol le r to scr ol l to other ima ges an d v id eo clip s. T his is u sef ul fo r perf or ming th e same action on sev er a l ima ges or vi deo clips, s uch as deleti ng mult iple i mages or vi de o clips. 4 To e x i t t h e P la ybac k me nu and r etur n to v ie w ing im ages in Pl ayb a ck , highl ight t he E X IT PL A Y BA C K M E N U opt i on and pr es s th e Menu /OK butto n. Th e f ollowing table su mmar i z es each of the Pl ayb a c k menu options a nd descr ibes the i nfor mation in th e bott om r ight cor ner of ea ch image whil e the Playb ack men u is dis pla y ed .
46 hp p ho tosmar t 850 user â s manual # Ic on Desc r ipti on 1 Ex its th e Pl ayb a c k me n u 2 or âPla ys an audio cli p âP la y s a v i deo cl ip 3 Delet es e i ther the curr ent i mage or vi deo cl ip , or a ll im ages and video cl ips , or for mats the me mo ry car d 4 Mag n i f i es t he dis pla y ed im age b y 4x 5D i s p l a y s t h e Setup m enu , which al lo ws yo u to set a number of pr ef erences on the camera 6 and /or âV isible if the c ur r ent imag e is s elect e d f or e- m a i l o r o th e r e- s er v i ce i n t h e Sha r e menu (see pag e 5 2) âV isible if the c ur r ent imag e is se l ect ed f or pr inting in the Shar e men u (s ee pag e 5 2) 1 2 4 3 5 10 8 7 9 6
Cha pter 3: R ev ie wi ng images and v ide o clip s 4 7 Pl a y Selec ting this Playba ck menu opt ion causes the ca mer a to play either an au dio clip th at is a ttac hed t o t he c u r r ently di splay e d stil l imag e , or the c u r r ent vi deo clip . Y ou cannot sel ect t his op tion if the r e is n o a udi o clip atta ched t o the cur r ent im age , or no v id eo cl ip currently d isplayed. Y ou can adjust the audio v ol ume by pr ess ing th e buttons on the Contr oller whil e the a udio c lip or v ide o clip is p lay ing . T o st op the clip whil e it is pla y ing , p r ess t he Men u/ OK button. 7 4 MP Sho w s the Re so l ut io n (su ch as 4MP ) and Compr es sio n (such as t he 2 st a r s f or Bett er ) f or the c u r r en t image , or bla nk if it is a v id e o clip 8 5 o f 14 Show s t he cur rent image n u mber of the tot a l numb er on t he m emo r y c ar d 9d a t e / time Sho ws the dat e an d time that t he cu r r ent ima ge was t a ken 10 0:2 5 or 0:2 5 âVis ible if the c ur r ent imag e has an au di o cl ip att ache d to it . T he le ngth of th e au di o cl ip is disp la ye d to th e r i ght o f t he ic on . âV isible if the c urr ent imag e is a vi deo clip . Th e l e ngth of t he vi deo clip is disp la yed to the r ight o f the icon . # Ic on Desc r ipti on
48 h p p hotos mar t 850 userâ s ma nua l Delete Selec ting this Playba ck menu opt ion dis pla ys th e De lete scr een, which l ist s sev er a l options: z Cance l â R et urns to the Playb ack menu z Thi s Ima ge â Deletes the c u r rentl y dis pla yed im age or v ideo clip z All Im ages â Deletes a ll of the ima g e s an d v id eo clip s on th e memor y card z Fo r m a t C a r d â Deletes al l of the ima g e s, v ide o clip s, an d f iles on t he mem ory car d , an d t hen for mat s the memor y ca r d U se the b uttons on t h e Contr ol ler to h ighl ight an option , a nd then press t he Me nu/ OK butt o n to se lect it . Magni fy Selec ting this Playba ck menu opt ion enlarges the im age on the Image Di spla y . T h is option is only f or v ie w ing an image o n t he Ima ge Disp la y; it do es no t per manen tly alter th e i mage . Y ou ca nnot selec t t his op ti on if a v id eo clip is c u r r ently di splay e d .
Cha pter 3: R ev ie wi ng images and v ide o clip s 49 Sel ecting this opti o n m agnif ies the imag e 4x. The center p o r tion of the ma gnif ied im age is disp la y ed a lo ng wi th fou r a rr ows , wh ich i nd i ca te t ha t y ou can sc r oll ar oun d th e m agnif ied imag e b y pr essi ng the a n d buttons on t he Controller . Pr ess th e Me n u/ OK bu tton t o ex it the magnif ied imag e and r et urn to the Pl a yb a c k men u . Setup Selec ting this Playba ck menu opt ion dis play s th e Set u p men u . Fo r inf or matio n a bout the Setup men u , see Cha p ter 6 : Adjusting the ca mer a set tin gs on page 63.
Cha pter 3: R ev ie wi ng images and v ide o clip s 5 0
Cha pter 4 : Using hp inst ant shar e 5 1 C hapter 4 : Using hp ins tant sh are This ca mer a has an e x c i ting featur e calle d HP Inst ant Share . T his f eatur e l ets yo u select imag es in the camer a to be aut omat ically pr oc essed lat e r when t he c amer a i s connected t o y our computer or to certain HP pr int ers . F o r e x a mple , y o u can sele ct i mages th at y o u w a nt to have pr inted , th en connect the camer a to the com puter o r pr inter , and the sel ected i mages will b e pr i n ted a utomat i c al l y . As an other ex a mple , y ou ca n sele ct i mages in the ca mer a to be a ut om ati cally p r oces sed b y HPâs e -ma il se r v ice . Wh e n the camer a connec ts to y our comput er , the s electe d image s ar e e-m ailed t o f amil y , f ri en ds, o r an y e -mail ad dr es s tha t y ou spec ify . The de tails a bou t this ar e e xp lained l ate r in this chapter . When y ou press the Sh ar e b utt on o n t he ca mer a , the mo st r ece ntl y tak en or v i e we d image a ppear s on t he Im age Disp la y , alo n g w ith an y pr int o r oth e r destin ati ons t hat h a ve bee n selected f or the imag e . Y ou ca n u se the button s on the Contr ol ler to s cr ol l th r ou gh the i mages to see dest inat ions f or the ot her imag es in t he camer a .
5 2 hp phot osma r t 850 userâs m anu al Usin g th e sh are me nu When y ou press the Sh ar e button, the Sh ar e men u also dis pla ys in the upper righ t -hand corner of the Image D ispl a y . The follo wing tabl e descr ibes each of t he Share menu options. NO TE Y our cam er a can be in an y mode ( St il l , Self - Timer , or Vid e o ) whe n u sing t he Sh ar e me n u options. # Icon Des cr ipt ion 1 Pr int 1 cop y o f c ur r ent ima ge w hen co nnec ted t o a computer or printer . By def ault , th e pi c tur e is pr inted 10 b y 15 cm ( 4 b y 6 inches) . 2 Pr int 2 cop ies of c u r r ent image when connect e d t o a computer or printer . 3 C us tomi z e this m enu ... lets y ou add e-ma il addresses and other e -s er v ices to th e Shar e me nu . T his pr ocedur e is e xpl ained l a te r in this c hapt er . 4 Che ck ma r k ind icates the d esti natio n has be en select ed for t he curr ently d isp la yed image. (Y ou can sel ect more than on e dest ination per ima ge .) 1 2 3 4
Cha pter 4 : Using hp inst ant shar e 5 3 U sing hp inst ant shar e to print pi cture s 1 T u rn on t he c amer a , and t hen pr es s the Sha r e bu t t on . 2 Use th e but tons on the Contr ol ler to scrol l to th e imag e y ou want to print . NO TE V ideo c lips canno t be sele cted f or pr inting . 3 Use the buttons on the Contr o ller to scroll to the pr int op tion y ou w ant in t he Shar e men u . 4 Pr ess t he Me n u/ OK bu t t on to select the pr int o pti on , and a appe ars ne x t to that pr int option. NO TE Yo u c a n s e l e c t t h e Pr i nt 1 cop y and t he Pr int 2 copie s pr i nt options f or a n imag e so that 3 copies of the im age will be pr i nted wh en con necte d to a computer o r printer . 5 Sc r ol l to other images by u s ing the buttons on t he Contr ol ler , an d r epe at st ep s 3 and 4 t o sele ct pr int options for e ach i mage . 6 When you ar e f i nishe d sel ecti n g a ll t he imag es you want to hav e pr in ted , pr es s t he Sha r e but ton to e xit th e Shar e menu . 7 T h e ne xt time y ou c on nec t t he came r a to y ou r com pu te r or a com patible pr inter , the images you s elec ted w ill be automat ically pr i nted. See Chapter 5: Unloa ding, pr inti ng , and displaying ima ges o n pa ge 59 fo r i n form at io n ab o ut connecting the came r a to a comput er or pr inter . NO TE Th e Shar e me nu c r eate s a st anda r d Di gita l Prin t Or de r F o rma t ( D PO F) fil e for p rin t op ti on s.
54 hp p ho tosmar t 850 user â s manual Usin g th e hp in stan t share e- mail serv ice U sing HP Inst ant Sha r e to e-mail ima ges in v olv es th r ee step s: 1 A dding e-m ail ad dr ess es t o t he came r a âs Sha r e men u (using your comput er and the ca mer a together ) . 2 Selec ting imag es t o b e e-mailed (u sing th e Sh a r e menu on the c ame r a ) . 3 Con nec ti ng th e ca mera to your c omputer to se nd the im ages yo u s el e c t e d. Addi ng , modif yin g, a nd r em o ving e-m ail address e s NO TE Y ou w ill need an I nter net connec tion t o comp lete this pr o ced ur e on a Windo ws computer . 1 T u rn on t he c amer a , and t hen pr es s the Sha r e bu t t on . 2 H ighli ght the Cu sto m i z e this men u ... op ti on and pr ess the Me n u/O K bu t ton. A messa ge on the Ima ge Di splay app ea rs as ki ng y ou to con ne ct th e c am er a to your computer . 3 Connect the camer a t o y our comp u ter b y u s ing t he U SB cab le or an opti onal HP Ca mer a Do ck . T his ac tiv ates the Ca mer a Sh ar e Men u Set up W i z ar d . 4 F rom t he f irst w indow of the W i z ar d on the computer , clic k on Re t r ieve from Ca m e r a . 5 In the scr een ca lled Modify S har e Men u : ⢠On W i ndo ws, check to se e that Photo E -ma il is v isibl e abov e the Add... button , then cl i ck on the A dd ... but ton . ⢠On Mac into sh , cli ck o n the Ad d.. . but ton .
Cha pter 4 : Using hp inst ant shar e 5 5 6 If you ar e using a: ⢠Window s computer , y ou will be asked to s ign i n to HP âs P assp ort pr ogram . HP P a s sport a llo ws y ou to u se HP âs fr ee e-m ail ser vi ce and other ser v ices t hat may be a va ilab le in th e f u tur e . T he f ir st time y ou s e e th is sc r een , y ou wil l need to r egi ster as a ne w u ser . F ol lo w the in structions on the screen to register . ⢠Mac into sh comp ut er , add t he e-mail ad dr ess es y ou w an t . T h en skip to ste p 8 . 7 On ce y ou have succ essfully r e gistered , s ign in to t he HP P assp ort pr og r am, and then the Phot o E -ma il Setup sc r e e n w ill a ppear . He r e , y ou ca n ent er an e-ma il addr es s and spec ify ho w y ou w a n t it t o app e ar in the camer a âs Sha r e me nu . Y ou can al so en ter a su bj ect and m e ss a g e to g o w ith al l e-ma il s that w il l b e sent to tha t addr es s . A f ter complet in g the for m, click Ne xt . I n the confirmat ion scr e en that appe ars, cl i ck Fi n i s h . 8 Y our newl y adde d e-mail destin ation s hould no w appe ar i n the M o dify Sh ar e Men u sc reen (in the Cu rr e nt S ha re M enu se ction) . T o add add ition al e- mail addr ess es to the c amera Shar e menu , repe at steps 5 - 7 on Windo ws, or steps 5-6 on Mac intosh. If y ou a r e using a Windo ws comput er , you w i ll n ot need to si gn in to t he HP P a ssport pr ogr am ag ain. 9 When y ou have f ini shed addin g e-mail ad dr es ses, clic k on Sa ve to Cam er a on a Windo ws computer or clic k on Ne xt on a Macintosh computer to add t he ne w addr ess es to the camer a Sha r e menu . When the computer conf irms that the a d d re ss e s we re s a ve d to yo u r c a m e ra, d i s c o n n e c t th e camer a fr om the com pu ter , and pr ess th e Sha r e bu t t on t o v ie w the ne w e-m ail des tinati ons in the Shar e menu . 10 Y ou a r e now r e ad y to se lect imag es on the ca m er a to be e-ma iled . See the ne xt section f or how t o do this.
56 h p p hotos mar t 850 userâ s ma nua l Sel ec ting im ag es to be e-m ailed 1 T u rn on t he c amer a , and t hen pr es s the Sha r e bu t t on . 2 Use th e but tons on the Contr ol ler to scrol l to th e imag e y ou want to e-mai l . NO TE V ide o clip s cannot be s elect ed fo r e-m ail . 3 Use the buttons on the Contr o ller to scroll to the e-mail de stina tio n that y ou w ant t o se lect . 4 Press the Me n u/O K bu t ton to select th e e -mail desti nation, and a app ears next to that e -ma il desti nation. NO TE Y ou ca n sel ect m or e th an o ne e- mai l de stin ati on o r pr int op tion f or an image . 5 Sc r ol l to other images by u s ing the buttons on t he Contr ol ler , an d r epe at ste ps 3 an d 4 to se lect e- mail desti nation s for each i mage. 6 When you ar e f i nishe d sel ecti n g a ll t he imag es you want to e-ma il , pr es s t h e Share button to e xit the Sha r e me n u . 7 Th e next time y ou connect the came r a to yo ur comput er , the i m a g e s y o u s e l e c t e d f o r e - m a i l w i l l b e s e n t t o t h e i r r e s p e c t i v e desti nation s. See C hap ter 5: U nload i n g, pr inting , and di splay i ng im ages on pa ge 5 9 f or infor mation about connecting the cam e r a t o a com put er . Th e w a y i mages ar e e - mailed w or ks di ffe r en tly on W i ndo ws and M ac intosh computer s, a s e x plai ned i n the following su bsec tio ns .
Cha pter 4 : Using hp inst ant shar e 5 7 Win d o ws Im age s ar e not e-mail ed dir ectl y to an yo n e . Ra th er , a mes sag e is s ent to each e -ma il address that you sele cted in th e Shar e me nu . Th e mes sag e cont ains a th umbn ail of eac h of t he imag es that w ere selec ted for that address, as well as a l ink to a web pag e wher e th e r e c ipient ca n vi e w the ima ges. F r om that w eb p age, the rec ipient can do t hings l ik e r e pl y to y ou or print t he im age . T his m ak es it e as y f o r peop le who u se d iff er en t e-ma il pr og r am s to be able to see y o ur i mages without the dif fic ul ty o f deal ing with e -mail attach ment s . Mac intosh Images are e- mail ed dir ect l y to r e c i p ient s u s ing the def aul t e-ma il pr og r am on your co m p u ter .
Cha pter 4 : Using hp inst ant shar e 58
Cha pter 5 : Unl oading , p r intin g , and displ ay ing images 5 9 C hapter 5 : Unlo a d ing , printi ng , and d i spla y i ng image s On ce y ou h av e ta k en p ic tur es , y o u can un lo ad th em f r om y our camer a t o a com pu te r , p r int them dir ectly to a p r inte r , o r dis play them on a televis i o n . Unlo ad ing to a com pu ter NO TE Y ou ca n al so us e the opt ional HP Camera Do ck t o do thi s tas k . Se e Ap pendi x B: C amer a doc k on page 9 5. NO TE If y ou ar e u sing a M ac intosh comput er , y ou must fir s t chan ge th e US B c o nf ig uration set t ing to Disk Dr iv e in t he Setup m enu . F or mor e information , see USB c on f ig urat ion on page 6 7. 1 Y our came r a came wit h a s pec ia l US B cabl e fo r connecting th e camer a to a computer . Connect the lar ger end of th at USB c able to th e com puter . 2 Ope n the ru bb er door on the sid e o f the ca mer a and con ne ct the sma ll end of the USB c able to the USB co nne ctor on th e c am er a.
60 hp p ho tosmar t 850 user â s manual 3 T u rn on the c amera . The HP Im age Unlo ad soft war e will launch on y our computer . If y ou hav e set the soft w a r e to aut om atically unload the i mages in t he cam er a , the imag es w ill a utom ati c all y unloa d t o the com pute r . Otherw ise , in the We l c o m e scr een, clic k Star t U nlo a d . If there w er e an y ima g e s in th e c amer a tha t w er e se lecte d in the Shar e me nu f or pr inting o r e-mail, t hos e acti ons a r e st art ed afte r the imag es hav e b een unloa ded to the computer . 4 When the u nloa d sc r ee n on the c ompu ter say s Fi n i s h e d , y our images hav e been sav ed a nd sh ar e d . Y ou c an no w disco nnect the came r a f r om th e com pute r . NO TE T o un load th e ca mer a im ages to a computer that does not have the HP P hoto & Imag ing so f t w are inst alle d on it , s wit ch th e camer a t o the Disk Dri ve setting in t he US B Con f igu r atio n su b-me nu o f the Setup men u . Th is all ow s the ca mer a to appe ar as anoth er d is k dri ve on the com puter so that yo u can eas ily cop y th e imag e f iles f r om the cam er a to th e ha r d d r iv e o f y o ur c ompu ter . Fo r more inf orm atio n , see USB con f ig ur atio n on pa ge 6 7 . Prin ting im a ges NO TE Y ou ca n al so us e the opt ional HP Camera Do ck t o do thi s tas k . Se e Ap pendi x B: C amer a do ck on page 95. T o pr int i mages that hav e been unlo aded to the c ompu ter , y ou can use the HP P hoto & I magi ng soft war e that was shi pped wi th t h e c am e ra. Y ou can also co n n ect the came r a dir ectl y to an y HP DeskJet o r Photosma rt pr inter that has a U SB conne ction , th en pr i n t im age s s elec t ed f r om t he c ame r a Shar e m en u or all im ages in the c ame r a.
Cha pter 5 : Unl oading , p r intin g , and displ ay ing images 61 T o print di r e ctly to a USB -enabl ed HP pr i n ter : 1 Y our came r a came wit h a spec ia l US B cab le fo r conne c ting the camer a directly to a pr i nter . Con nect t he s q ua r e end of the US B cabl e to th e printer . 2 Ope n the ru bb er door on the sid e o f the ca mer a and c onne ct th e sma ll en d of th e USB cabl e to th e US B co nne ctor on the camer a. 3 Adjust the set t ings i n the Pr i nt Se tup menu on t he c amer a to co mp lete the pr i nting pr oc ess. D ispla yi ng ima ge s on a TV Im age s in y ou r came r a can easil y be dis pl a ye d as a sli de sho w on almost a n y T V (tel e vision) . NO TE Y ou ca n al so us e the opt ional HP Camera Do ck t o do thi s tas k . Se e Ap pendi x B: C amer a doc k on page 9 5. 1 T o conne ct the cam er a dir ectl y to a T V , y ou mu st f irst purc hase an A/ V (A ud io/Vide o) c a b le . F o r more inf orm atio n , see P ur chasing camer a accesso r ies on page 9 3. 2 On the c am er a, check that the TV con figur a tion opt ion in the Set u p men u is se t cor r ectl y f or y our ar ea . See TV co nfiguratio n on page 6 8. 3 Re fer to the do c u men tation f or the T V to dete rmin e how to se t the TV t o ta k e vi deo inp u t f r om an e xte r nal vi deo s our ce (your ca mer a ) in stead of the antenna or cable TV .
6 2 hp phot osma r t 850 userâs m anu al 4 Connect t he A/ V cabl e to the A/ V in pu ts on the T V an d to the TV connect or on y our came r a. Th e camera st ar ts a s lideshow of each imag e , play in g an y at tache d audio clip or v id eo clip , an d th en f adin g t o th e ne xt imag e . Y o u c an also manua lly scr ol l thr ough the image s b y pressing the buttons on the c amer a Con t r o l le r . NO TE The Image Display on the camera turns off when the camer a is connect ed to a T V . Ho we v er , y ou can s till u s e the Pla yb a c k an d Shar e men u s w hil e connect e d to the TV . (T he me nu s w ill dis pl ay on th e TV sc r een .)
Cha p t er 6: A dj usting th e c amer a settings 6 3 C hapter 6 : Ad ju st in g t h e cam era se t ti ngs Usin g th e setu p m en u The Setup me nu all ow s y ou t o adj u st a n umb er of came r a se ttings , su c h a s t he came r a so un ds, da te and time , an d the conf igur ation o f t he USB or T V connection . Y ou can access the Setup menu fr om e ithe r the Capt ur e or Pl a yb a ck menu . NO TE Y our cam er a can be in a n y mode ( Sti l l , Self- Timer , or Vid e o ) wh en u sing t he Se tu p menu options. 1 To d i s p l a y t h e Setup menu , open either the Capt ur e or Pl ayb a ck menu a nd use the but tons o n th e Contr ol ler to h ighlight the Setup menu option . Then pr ess the Me n u/O K bu t ton. (F or in f ormation about these other men us, see Us ing t he capt ur e m en u o n pa ge 34 an d Usin g the pl a yback m enu on pag e 4 5.) Scr een one Scr een t w o
6 4 hp p hotos mar t 850 userâ s ma nua l 2 Us e the bu ttons on the Controller t o scr oll through t he Setup me nu options. 3 E ither press the Me n u/ OK but ton to selec t a high lighted option and displ a y its s u b- menu , or use the but tons on the Contr oller to cha nge the setting for the highlighted option without go ing to its sub-menu . 4 Withi n a sub- menu , use the buttons on the Contr ol ler an d the Me n u /OK bu t t on t o c han ge t he se tting f or the Setup menu option . 5 To e x i t t h e Setup men u an d r etur n to the Capt ure menu or Pl ayb a ck menu , high light th e EXIT S ET UP m enu option and pr es s the Menu /OK butto n . Audio record Thi s Setu p me nu option allow s you t o tur n a uto mati c aud io r ecor ding w ith still images on or o ff . The defaul t Au d io Re c o rd se tting is Off . Fo r m o r e i n f o r m a t i o n , s e e Re c ord i ng audio on p age 31.
Cha p t er 6: A dj usting th e c amer a settings 65 Insta nt r e v i e w Thi s Setu p me nu option allow s you t o set how long Ins tant R e v ie w is dis pla yed on th e activ e disp la y af ter y ou take a p ictur e . T his option als o allows you to turn In st ant Re vi e w off . Th e def ault se t ting is t o dis p la y Instant R ev ie w for 4 se conds. Fo r m o r e i n f o r m a t i o n , s e e U sing inst ant r e vi e w on page 25. Ca mer a so und s Camera sounds ar e the sounds that the c amer a mak es wh en y ou tu r n it on , pr es s a butto n , or tak e a pi ct ur e. C amer a sou nds ar e not the audio sound s r e cor de d with i mages or v ideo cl ips . Thi s Setu p me nu option allow s you to set the v olum e le v e l of the cam er a s o u n ds , o r t u rn c a m e ra s ou n d s of f . The defau l t Camer a Sounds sett ing is Lo w .
66 hp p ho tosmar t 850 user â s manual Eye - S t a r t Thi s Setu p me nu option allow s you to t urn th e ey e - sta rt se ns or for the v i e w f ind er mic r odis pla y on an d o ff . z On âC au ses the c am er a to t urn the m ic rodis play on an y t im e the e ye -star t sen sor dete cts th at y ou ar e l oo ki ng through the viewfin der . T his is t he de fa ult se tting o n the ca m er a . z Off âDisa bles the ey e -s tar t sens or an d ca use s th e came r a t o tu r n th e mi c r odi spl a y on an y ti me t he Im ag e Disp la y is tur ned o f f . NO TE If Ey e - St art is s et to Of f , the mi cr odisp la y w ill au toma tica lly tur n o ff if the r e is no bu tton ac tiv ity fo r 6 0 seco nds . T o tu r n t he mi cr odispl ay on again , e ithe r pr ess the Shu t t er b ut t on h a l f way down o r p res s th e Disp lay but t on. Da te & time Thi s Setu p me nu option allow s you t o se t the current date and time, as well as the da te /time f orm a t, for the camera. This is usually done when you first set up the ca mera, but you may need to re-se t the date and time whe n y ou a re tr avellin g to diff erent time zones, or when the batteries are re moved fr om the cam era for mo re than 10 min utes. T o set the da te , t ime , and date /t ime format , foll o w th e sam e pr oce dur e u sed in Set ti ng the date a nd t im e on p age 17.
Cha p t er 6: A dj usting th e c amer a settings 6 7 USB co nf iguration This Setu p menu o ption determines how the ca mera appe ars when connected to a computer. z Di gital Cam er a âC auses the computer to recognize the cam era as a dig ita l cam era us ing the Pic tur e Tran sfer Prot ocol (P TP) standard. Thi s is the d efault setting on the cam era. Use this set tin g for unl oadi ng an d sh ari ng on ei the r a Wi ndow s computer that has the HP Photo & Imaging software installed o n it, or on a Ma cin tosh OSX co mputer that does not have the H P Photo & Imag ing software installed on it. z Disk Dr i ve âCau ses the computer to re c o gnize the camera as a d is k dri ve usi ng t he Ma ss St orag e Dev ice Cl ass (MSD C) standa rd. Use this setting for u nloading and shar in g on eithe r a Mac into sh comp uter , or on a Wind ows computer that d o e s not have the HP Pho to & Imaging software installed on it.
68 h p p hotos mar t 850 userâ s ma nua l TV co n f ig u r ati o n Thi s Setu p menu option se ts th e for ma t of the v ide o signal for dis pla ying c amer a i mages on a televis ion ( T V ) th at i s con ne cted to t he came r a w it h an opti onal A udi o/ V ideo c able or HP camera doc k. z NT S C âf orma t used p rima r ily in No r t h Am er ic a an d Ja pan z PA L âfo rm at u sed pr imar il y in E ur ope The de f ault setting de pen ds on the l a n guage t hat y ou sele cted w hen y ou p ow er ed on the camer a f or t he f irs t time. F or m or e inf orm atio n , see Choosing the l anguage on page 17 . F or mo r e in f or ma tio n on conne cting t he c ame r a to a T V , see ei th er Disp la y ing imag es o n a T V on pa ge 61 w he n u sin g an optional A udio /V id eo cabl e , or Displa y ing images o n a TV us in g th e do ck on page 98 when usi ng t he HP Ca mer a D ock . Lan gu ag e This Setu p menu option sets the language of the ca mera interface, including the text in m enus and on the Image Dis pla y. Th e d ef aul t se tting is English . T o s et t he l angu age on t he came r a , follo w the sa me pr o ced ur e use d in Choosi ng the language on page 17.
Ch apter 7 : T rouble sho oti ng and s uppo rt 6 9 C hapter 7 : T roub l esho otin g an d su ppor t Proble ms and solu tions Pr oble m P oss ibl e cau se Sol ut i on Th e c am era does not turn on. The batter ies ar e func tioning incor r e ctl y , ar e install ed incor r e ctl y , or ar e missing. Use onl y photo-qualit y AA lit hi um, al k a li ne, or NiM H batter ies. Th e char ge i n the b a t ter ies can be lo w or c ompl ete ly dr a in ed. T r y ins tallin g new or r echar g ed batter ies. Ensur e that the batter ies a r e inse rted corr ectl y . Th e HP A C adapter is not connected t o th e c a me r a, o r is not pl ugged int o a po wer outlet . Ensure t h at the H P A C adapter is connected t o the camer a and is pl ugg ed i nt o a w or king el ect r ic al out let. Th e HP A C adapter is not fu nc ti on i n g cor re ctl y . Ensure t h at the H P A C adapter is not damaged or defecti ve and is pl ugg ed i nt o a w or king el ect r ic al out let.
7 0 hp phot osma r t 850 userâs m anu al Th e mi cr odi sp l ay in the view fi nde r does not t ur n on. Th e e ye - sta rt sens or c anno t detect that y ou ar e looking th r ou g h the view fi nd e r . T ur n the e y e -start sensor off by usi n g th e Eye - Sta rt opti on in the Setu p menu (see page 66). D o ing s o wi ll ca u se t h e mi c r odi s pla y t o tur n on automati c all y a n y time the Image Displa y is off . I re place the camera batter i es fre qu e n t ly . Extend ed Image Di s play use , e x c essi ve f lash u se , and e x cess i ve zo o m i n g consum e a l ot of b at ter y pow er . Use an HP A C adapt er to p o wer the camera wh en y ou are u s ing t he Image Dis play f or an e x ten ded peri od of tim e , or u s e th e view fi nd er m icrod is play instead of t he Image Display . Use the f lash and z o o m spar ingly . Do not u se or dinary alk aline batter ies . P u r chas e highe r -gr a de b a tt e rie s , s uc h a s â u lt ra â o r â pr emiu m â gr ade alk al ine or phot o -lithium batter ies, o r s wit ch to rech a r g e abl e N iM H b at teries. F or the best r esu l ts with y our camer a, u se photo-lithium or NiMH batter ies. Th e Ni M H batter ies y ou ar e using w er e r echar ge d incor r e ctl y , or ha ve dr aine d on the ir o wn because the y ha ve not been use d la tely . Wh en N iMH ba tte r ies ar e br and new or have no t b een use d in s e v er al mont hs, th ey should be c har ged and f ull y dr ain ed 3-4 times to r each op timum capacity . A ls o , NiM H batt er ies dis ch ar ge on their ow n when not in us e. So if y o u ha v e no t use d th em in a w ee k o r mo r e , t he y ma y bene f it fr o m b ei ng ch a r g e d. Pr oble m P oss ibl e cau se Sol ut i on
Ch apter 7 : T rouble sho oti ng and s uppo rt 7 1 Th e c am era batter ies will not char ge. Re char geable bat t eri es are not in ser te d. Install N iM H batter ies . L ithium an d alk ali ne ba tt er i es c ann ot be re c h a rg e d. Batter ies are alr eady ch arge d. Battery char ging will not s tart if the ba tte r ies wer e r e ce ntly ch arge d. T r y cha rgi ng the m again after the y hav e dr aine d awh i le. Battery voltage is too l o w fo r ch arg ing to start . Th e camer a w ill no t attempt t o char ge bat t eri es that ma y be damaged or o v er -dischar g ed. Char ge them in a dedicated battery char ger , t h en try t hem in the camera again. If this d oes not w or k , pur chase ne w batteri es. Th e c am e r a ha s not tur ned of f yet . The ca me r a o nly cha r ge s wh en i t is off or asleep and is c onnected to an A C po wer so u r ce. T o initiat e char ging imm ediat el y , turn o f f the camer a. Otherw ise , the camera w ill start c h ar ging when it tur ns it se lf o ff af ter there h as b ee n n o button acti vity f or 6 minutes . Th e w r o n g date and/ o r time is show n. The batter ies died or w er e re m o ve d f ro m th e c a me r a f o r mo r e th an 10 minut es. R e s et the date and tim e b y using th e Date & T ime option in the Setu p menu . ( See Dat e & time on page 66.) Pr oble m P oss ibl e cau se Sol ut i on
7 2 hp phot osma r t 850 userâs m anu al Th e c am era does not re sp o n d when I pr ess a button. Th e c am e r a is tu rne d of f or has sh ut do wn . T urn on the c amer a, o r t ur n it off and then on again. Th e c am e r a is connected t o a comp uter . Th e camer a buttons , e xcept for th e OF F/Mode select or , do no t r es po nd wh en th e came r a is connected t o a comput er . The batter ies ar e drained . R e pl ace or r echar ge the b att eri es. Th e c am e r a has st oppe d oper ating. R emo v e an d r ei nse rt t he ba tte r i e s . R e pl ace the batter ies if ne cessary . Th e c am era does not take a p ic tur e when I pr ess the Shutter button . Yo u d i d n o t pr ess the Shutter butt on har d enough . Pr ess th e Shu t t er button all t he way dow n. T he memory car d is not install e d . Inst a ll t he memory car d. T he memory car d is full . Unload images f r om the camera to y o ur com puter , then delete all images o n the memor y card . Or r eplace the c ar d wit h a new o ne. T he memory car d is lock ed. Unloc k the memory car d. Th e fla s h i s re c h a rg i n g . W ait until t he flash has r echar ge d bef or e tak ing another p ictur e . Th e c am e r a is still sav ing the last p ictur e y ou took . W ait a f e w se con ds f or t he camer a t o finish pr ocessing t he im ag e , an d th en p r es s th e Shutter button . Pr oble m P oss ibl e cau se Sol ut i on
Ch apter 7 : T rouble sho oti ng and s uppo rt 7 3 A long d elay occurs be tw een t he tim e I pr ess the Shutter bu tto n an d the cam er a tak es a pict u re. Th e c am e r a is in Self- Time r or Vide o mode . Sw i t c h t o St i ll mode . Th e c am e r a needs time t o lock f ocu s and exp os u r e. Use F o cus Lo ck . (See Usi ng fo c u s loc k on p age 2 6 .) Th e c am e r a is ta kin g a long exp os u r e. Use a tripod or the pop- u p f l a sh. My image is blurry . Th e c am e r a w as set to No rm al foc us when it should ha ve been set to Ma c r o fo cus , o r vic e vers a. S et th e ca m er a to Ma cr o fo c u s o r to Normal f o c us, and try t a king the p ictur e again. (See Us i ng th e f ocu s settings on page 2 7.) Yo u m o v e d t h e cam er a w hile y ou took th e pict u r e. Hold the cam er a st eady as you pr ess the Sh ut t er bu tton or u se a tr ipod. The lig ht i s low and the f lash is turn e d o ff . In dim ligh t , the cam er a requir es a longer e x posur e. U se a tr ipod to h o l d the camer a steady , impr ov e ligh ting conditions, or use the flas h. Th e c am e r a fo cus ed o n t h e wr ong thing , or w as unable to fo cus. Use F o cus Lo ck . (See Usi ng fo c u s loc k on p age 2 6 .) Pr oble m P oss ibl e cau se Sol ut i on
7 4 hp phot osma r t 850 userâs m anu al My image is to o brig ht. Th e fla s h pr o vi ded too much l ight. T u rn off th e flas h (p r e ss th e po p - up f lash as sem bl y do wn until it snap s shut). A nat ur al or artifi c ial sour c e oth er th a n t he fl ash p r ovid e d too mu ch l ight. T ry t a king th e pictur e fr om a differ ent angle . Av oi d p o inting the camera dir ectly to w ar d a br ight li ght or r efl e c tiv e surface on a sunn y day . U se the Fl a s h O n se t ting (see p age 2 9) or adj ust th e Expo sure Com pens ation (s ee page 28). Yo u w e r e t o o clos e to the subj ect to use th e fl as h. Mov e back f r om the su bject or set th e fla sh to Fl a s h O f f and tak e the pi ctur e again . My image is too dark . There w as not enough light. Wait for na tural lighting conditions to improv e, add indi rect light ing , or adj ust t he Exposur e Comp ensati on (se e page 28). The f l ash was on, bu t the subject w as too fa r awa y. Make su re your subject is within the flas h w orking dista nce (see Append i x C : Specif ications on page 99) or try turning flash of f ( will requ ire a lon ger ex posu re). A ligh t shone behind the subject. Use the Fl a s h O n setting (see page 2 9) to brighten the subject. Or adjust the Exposure Compe nsati o n (s ee page 28) . Yo ur fin ger blocke d the flas h. Be s ure to move your f ingers away fro m th e flash when you take a pictu r e. Pr oble m P oss ibl e cau se Sol ut i on
Ch apter 7 : T rouble sho oti ng and s uppo rt 7 5 Erro r m e ss a g e s Y ou ma y see err or messages on the camer a or on y our computer scr een. Er r or message s on the c amer a M essage P ossible cau se Solution B A TTER IE S DEP LETED Ca mer a is shutting down Batt er y p o wer is too l ow t o contin ue oper ation . Re place or r echar ge bat te r i es, or us e an optional HP A C adapt er . Battery lo w Batt ery po wer is lo w and the camer a will shu t do wn soon . E ither r echar ge or r eplace the batter ies. Batter ies ar e too low f or Li ve Vie w Batt er y p o wer is too l ow to u se Li ve Vi ew on the Image Displa y . T a ke pict ur e s wi th th e view f i nd e r m icrod i sp l a y instead of the Image Display . Repl ac e or re ch a rg e b a t t eri e s, o r us e an optional H P A C adapter . Unsupported ca r d T he c ar d in th e memory slot is not a m emor y ca r d o r is n ot a supported memory ca r d. Ensur e tha t t he m e mo r y c a rd is t he p rop e r t yp e fo r you r ca m era . ( Se e App endi x C: Sp eci f ica tio ns on pag e 9 9. ) No ca r d in camera T he c ame r a do es not ha v e a memory ca r d ins talled . Install a memory ca r d.
7 6 hp phot osma r t 850 userâs m anu al Ca r d is unf ormatted T he memory car d nee ds t o b e f or matted. F or mat the memory car d by us i ng t he Fo r m a t C a rd option in the Dele te menu . This will dele te all data on the car d . Ca r d ha s wr o ng fo rm at T he memory car d is f ormatt ed f or a differ ent de vi ce such as an MP3 pl a yer . Re - forma t th e c ard b y us in g the F o rm a t C a rd option in the Delete men u . Una ble to for mat Th e me mory car d is c o rru pt e d. Re place t he memory c ar d. Ca r d is lo c ked The lock i ng tab on the si de o f the memory ca r d is in the loc k ed position . S wit ch the locking tab t o th e unl oc k ed po sit io n or insert a new car d. Char g ing F l ash ... The ca mera i s re c h a rg i n g t h e fla s h. It take s longer to ch a r ge th e f las h w hen t he ba tt eri es ar e low . If y o u see this message a lo t, yo u may need t o r eplace or recha rg e the ba t teries. Ca r d ful l There is in su f f icient r o om to save m ore images o n the memory ca r d. Unload images fr om the camera t o your c omput er , then de let e a l l images on the memory car d. Or r eplac e t he ca r d w ith a ne w one . M essage P ossible cau se Solution
Ch apter 7 : T rouble sho oti ng and s uppo rt 77 Una ble to f o c us T he s ub j ect di d not pro vide enough con tr ast f or the camer a to fo cus pro p erly . Use F o c us L ock befor e taking the pi ctur e ( see pag e 2 6). Fo c us t o o f a r The f o cus distance is bey ond wh er e th e c a me r a c a n fo cus. M ak e sur e the camer a is not set to Ma c r o fo c u s . F ocu s too close The f o cus distance is clo ser th an the ca m era can f oc us . Set the ca mer a to Ma cr o f oc us , o r if se t t o Ma c r o fo cus , move fu rth e r a way f r om the su bject . Blinking The ca me r a i s se t to Ma c r o fo cu s, but t he f ocu s is too f ar . Or the cam er a is set to Normal fo cu s, but t he f ocu s is too c lose . Set the ca mer a to Ma cr o fo cus o r to No r ma l fo cus, and tr y taking th e pic tu r e agai n . (See Using the f ocus settings on pag e 2 7.) Blinking Th e sc ene is dar k and a flash is re c o m m e n d e d . Use the pop-up flash (see Using the p op-up flash on pag e 2 9), or u se a t r ip od . Red F- num be r o r shutter s p eed The ca mera i s out of r a n ge for the selected ap er tu r e or shutte r spee d . Select a di ff eren t apertur e if using the Av E x p os u re Mo de se t ti ng , o r a di ff eren t shutt er spee d if us in g the Tv setting . M essage P ossible cau se Solution
7 8 hp phot osma r t 850 userâs m anu al No im age s in camera T he r e ar e no images o r vi d eo clips in the cam er a and y ou ar e tr y ing to re vi e w t h e m . Ta k e s o m e p i c t u re s o r vid e o c li ps. Ca nnot display image P ossibly comes fr o m c o py i n g im ag es to th e memory ca r d fr o m a co m pu te r , or a corrupt ed image cau se d b y th e c a me r a n o t shutting do wn pr operl y . Use the HP s oft war e to ed it the images copied on the m emo r y car d. Also , do not re m ove b a tt e rie s o r th e memo ry ca r d w h en t he c a m e ra i s t u rn e d o n. Unkno wn USB de vi ce The ca mera i s connected t o a USB de vi c e t hat it does not re c o g n iz e. M a ke s u re t ha t t h e c a m era is connected t o a support e d p r inter or computer . Unsupported pr inter T he p r inter is an unsupported de vi c e . Connec t t he camer a to a supported p rint er , such as an HP De skj et o r Photo sma rt pr int er . Or connect t h e camer a to a computer and prin t fr om th er e inst ead . M essage P ossible cau se Solution
Ch apter 7 : T rouble sho oti ng and s uppo rt 7 9 Una ble to commun i c at e w ith pr inter There is no connecti on bet ween the cam er a and pr inte r . M ak e sur e the cable is connecte d b etw een the camera o r camer a dock and th e prin ter . If that does not w ork , turn off the camera and d is c onnect it . T urn the pr inter off a nd t h e n o n a g a i n . R e - c o n n e c t the camer a and turn it on. A supported pr inter is eithe r tur ne d off or not connected to t he cam er a. M ak e sur e the camer a is connected to a support e d pr inter and that the pr inter is turn e d on . Photo tr a y is engaged T he s ele ct ed paper s i ze cannot be used w ith the pr inter phot o tra y . Dis eng ag e th e pr in ter photo tr ay , or c hange the pa per si z e . Pr inter top cov er is open T he p r inter is open. Cl ose th e top c over of t he pr inte r . Inc orr e ct o r missing print cartri d ge The print er cartri dge i s t he incor r e c t model or is m issing . Install a ne w pr inter c a r t rid g e, t u rn th e p rin t er off , then turn it bac k on . Pr inter has a paper jam or The pr int car r iage ha s stalled Th ere is a paper jam or the pr inte r c ar r iage has sta lle d. T urn off the pr inter . Clea r the paper j a m , and then tu rn o n the p r in ter . M essage P ossible cau se Solution
80 hp p ho tosmar t 850 user â s manual Er r or message s o n the com puter Pr inter is out of paper Y o u r prin ter is out of paper . If OK is v isibl e on t he Image Displa y , lo ad paper an d th en pr es s t he Men u/ OK butt on on the camer a . Other w ise , lo ad paper , an d th en pr es s OK or Con tinue on y our prin ter . Pr inting ca nceled T he pr int job has been can celed. Pr ess the Men u/ OK button on the camer a. C omplet e the pr int r equest again. An y err or co de num b ers t hat appear T he camer a ma y have a h ard wa r e or firmwar e pr oblem . T urn the cam er a off and then on again . I f the pr oblem per sists, call HP Support (s ee page 8 2) . M essage P ossible cau se Solution Connec tion be t w een t he imaging d e vi c e and computer fa i le d The ca mera might be connecte d to a compute r through a USB hub. Try conne cting the camera directly to the comp uter, or disconne ct othe r dev ices a ttached to the USB hu b. Th e s of t wa r e cannot r e tr ie ve the S ha r e M e nu i n form a t i on fro m you r ca m era The co mpute r n eeds t o w r it e f iles to the memory ca r d du r ing HP Inst ant Shar e setup , but the memory car d is e ither missing , f ull , or lock ed. E ither ins tall a me mory ca r d, make r o om on the memo ry c ar d , or unl oc k it . M essage P ossible cau se Solution
Ch apter 7 : T rouble sho oti ng and s uppo rt 8 1 Compu ter c annot fi nd t h e connected camera The ca mera i s tur ne d o ff . T u rn o n th e c a m era. The ca mera i s not working cor r e ctl y . Connec t the camer a dir ect ly to a U SB- en abl ed HP Des kJe t or P ho t osma rt pr inte r and pr int an image . T his w ill v er ify that the image , memory c ar d , US B c on nec ti on , and t he USB c abl e ar e fun cti oni ng c o rre ct l y , or no t. The cab le i s no t connected cor r e ctl y . M ak e su r e that the cable is f ir m l y connected to t h e computer and ca mer a. The ca mera i s connected to t he comput er th r ou gh a USB h ub , an d y our USB hub is no t compatible w ith th e c a me r a. Connec t the camer a dir ec tl y t o a U SB po rt o n the comput er . Yo u a r e u s i n g th e H P C am era Do c k an d f or go t to pres s th e Save /P r int button . Pr ess the Sa v e/ P r i nt button on the doc k. T he memory car d is lock ed. Unlock th e m emo r y car d. The USB connection fa iled. Reb oot the computer . M essage P ossible cau se Solution
8 2 hp phot osma r t 850 userâs m anu al Getting assist ance F ind ing hel p on t he w eb HP pr od uct su pp ort Vi s i t ww w . hp .c om /s up po r t t o f ind inf or ma tio n abou t setting u p and usi ng your ca mer a, do wnload ing d r iv ers , solv i ng a pr o blem , order in g , an d w a r ranty information. HP p hotosmar t w ebsite Vi s i t w w w . hp .c om/photosma rt for t ip s o n us i n g you r ca m era mo r e e ff e c ti ve ly an d c r ea ti v el y a s w ell a s HP dig ital ca mer a dri ver upd ates an d sof t w are . HP accessibility w ebsite Vi s i t w ww .hp . co m/hpinf o /comm u nity/ a ccessib il ity/pr odserv if you hav e a di sab il it y and ne ed he lp . C ontac ting hp c us tomer su ppor t In ad dition to the W eb, y ou can contact HP b y telephone o r mail f or su ppor t an d se rvi ce f or y our came r a . Pr i ces , av ai labil it y , and h o u rs o f suppor t ar e s ub je ct to chang e without not ic e. Ho w hp can help T he H P su ppor t ho tline can help r esol ve p r oble ms w ith se tu p , ins tall ati on , conf igur ati on , and o per ati on . F o r help w ith non -HP h a rd wa re o r s o f t w are , p l e a s e c o n t a c t t h e m a nu f a c t u re r .
Ch apter 7 : T rouble sho oti ng and s uppo rt 83 Bef or e y ou c all R e vi ew tr ou bleshoo ting tips . Ha ve t he fol l o wi ng i n form at io n re ady be fore y o u ca l l : z ser ia l n u mber (found on the bot tom o f your camera) z pr od uct na me z date of purc hase Se rvi ce is fr ee o f c ha r ge dur ing the w ar r anty p er i od . Be y on d t he w ar r an t y per io d , a serv ice f ee w il l be ch ar ged . O btaining sup port i n t he United Sta tes F ree telephon e sup port for one yea r W it hin one year of yo u r pur chase , telep hone suppor t is provid ed to you free o f ch a rge. I f th i s i s a l on g di s t a nc e ca l l fo r y o u , long d ista nce charges will apply . Call (1) (208) 3 2 3- 25 51. Our s upport sta ff i s av a ilable fr om 6 am to 10 pm M ountai n T ime , M o n da y thr ou gh F ri day , o r 9 am to 4 pm Sa tur da y . If you think y our HP pr oduct m ight need servi c e , call HP C usto mer Support , whic h ca n help de te r mine if serv ice is re q u i re d. O r , vi s i t w w w .hp .c om/cpsosupport/guide/psd/ re p a i r h el p. h t m l f or t he nea r est sale s and servi ce o ff i ce . Af te r t h e fi rs t y e ar Call (1) (208) 3 2 3- 25 51. A f e e of $ 2 5 . 00 pe r ca ll (U . S .) wi ll b e char ged to y our c r edit card . C ha r ges begin only when yo u con nect with a s upport techni ci a n .
84 hp p ho tosmar t 850 user â s manual Upgrad e d war rant y op tions Y ou c an select one of the follo wi n g upg r ad ed warr anty options (a va ila b l e in t he U . S . o nl y ): z S t an dar d Ne xt Da y Ex chang e z A cc ide n tal Dam age Pr ote cti on w i t h Ne xt Da y Ex chan ge Upg r ade your stan dar d factory w arr an t y to thr e e years with the HP S upport P ack. S er v ice cov er a ge b egi ns on product pur ch ase da te a nd the p ack mu st be pur chase d with in t he f i rst 180 da ys of pr od uct pu r chase. HP will determine the har dwar e ser v ic e o f f er ing b ased upon the outcome o f s y stem self-test pr o gr a m s run by the custom er through the i nit ial c all to th e HP Cu st omer Car e C enter . If du r i ng y our technical s u pport cal l it is determine d that your product nee ds replacement, HP w i ll sh ip y o u thi s r epl acement product n e x t busin ess day f r ee of ch ar ge. Opt i onal Acc idental Da mage Pr ote ction i s also av a ilable. This war rant y upgr ade pr ote cts aga inst acc idental breakage such as spill s, dr ops, or f a lls. Both of these warr ant y upg r ades o ffer max imi z ed u ptime an d pr oduc tiv it y , the con v eni enc e o f d o o r - to -d oor pick up wi th deliv er y , p ackaging an d fr eight pr ep aid b y HP . F or mor e inf ormation call 1-888-999- 4 7 4 7 or visit w w w . hom eandoffi ce.hp .com and sele ct â war r a n t y upg r adesâ under â pr o duct s upport . â O btaining sup port w or ldw ide T elep h o ne suppor t is fr ee f or one y e ar in A sia an d the South P acifi c , a nd for 30 day s i n the M iddle East and Afr ic a . T h e info rmati on cont ained in this doc ume n t a nd the a ppli cabl e cond itio ns for H P ph one su pport ar e su bj ect to ch ange with out n oti ce . P l e as e chec k f or the lat est inf or m a tio n and cond iti ons at www .h p .c om /s u p po rt .
Ch apter 7 : T rouble sho oti ng and s uppo rt 85 Alternativ ely , y ou c an ask your de aler or ca ll HP at the p hone n umbe r l is ted in this d o c ument . F or English su ppo rt in E ur op e , contac t 4 4 (0) 20 7 512 5 2 02 . Alger ia 213 (0) 61 56 4 5 43 Ar gen tin a 0 810 5 5 5 5 5 20 Aus t r al i a 6 3 (3) 88 77 800 0 (or local ( 0 3) 8 8 77 800 0) Aus t r ia 4 3 ( 0) 8 10 00 6080 Bahr a in 800 7 2 8 Belgium Du tch : 3 2 ( 0)2 6 2 6 8806 F r en c h : 3 2 (0) 2 6 2 6 880 7 Br a zil (11) 3 7 4 7 77 99 ( Gr ande Sã o P aulo) 080 0 15 77 51 ( ou t side Gr ande São P aulo) Canada 905 206 466 3 ( dur ing the war ran t y per iod) 87 7 62 1 47 2 2 ( a f t e r t h e w a r r a n t y p e r i o d ) Ce ntr al Ame r ica a nd the Car ibb ean 1 800 71 1 2884 Chile 800 360 99 9 ( P o st-sales Home Comp uting) China 8 6 ( 1 0 ) 6 5 6 4 5959 Colombia 9 800 11 4 7 2 6 Cz e c h Republic 4 2 ( 0)2 6130 7 310 Denm ar k 45 3 9 29 40 9 9 Egy pt 02 5 32 5 222 Fi n l a n d 35 8 (0)203 4 7 288 Fr a n c e 3 3 (0)8 9 2 6 9 60 2 2 (E ur o 0. 34/m inu te) German y 4 9 (0)180 5 2 5 8 143 (Eur o 0. 12/minute) Gr e ece 30 1 0 6 0 7 3 60 3
86 h p p hotos mar t 850 userâ s ma nua l Guatema la 1 800 999 5105 Hong K on g S A R 85 2 3 0 02 8 5 55 Hu n g ary 36 (0)1 38 2 1111 India 1 600 11 2 2 6 7 or 91 11 68 2 603 5 Indonesia 6 2 (21) 3 50 3408 Ir el and 353 ( 0 ) 1 662 5525 Israel 9 7 2 ( 0) 9 8 30 4848 Italy 3 9 0 2 2 64 1 03 5 0 Japan 05 7 0 000 511 (ins i de Japan) 8 1 3 33 35 98 0 0 ( o ut s i de J ap a n ) K or ea , Re publ ic of 8 2 (2) 3 2 7 0 0 7 0 0 (Seoul ) 0 8 0 9 99 0 7 00 (outside Se o u l) Mala ys i a 1 8 00 80 5 40 5 Me xi c o 5 2 5 8 9 9 2 2 (Me x ic o C it y ) 01 800 4 7 2 6 684 ( outs ide M e x ico City) Midd le East /Afr ica 4 4 ( 0 ) 20 7 512 5 2 02 Mor occo 212 2 2 4 04 7 4 7 Net her lands 0900 20 20 16 5 (Eur o 0. 10/minute) Ne w Ze aland 0 800 441 14 7 Norw a y 4 7 22 11 6 29 9 Pe r u 0 800 10111 Philippines 63 ( 2 ) 8 6 7 -3 5 51 Po l a n d 48 2 2 86 5 9 8 00 Po r t u g a l 3 51 21 317 63 3 3
Ch apter 7 : T rouble sho oti ng and s uppo rt 8 7 Pu e r t o R i c o 1 8 77 2 3 2 058 9 Ro m a n i a 40 1 315 4 4 4 2 (or local 01 3154 4 4 2) Ru s s i a n Fe d e ra t i o n 7 095 7 9 7 3 5 20 (M o s co w ) 7 812 346 7 99 7 (St . P etersbur g ) Sau d i A r ab ia 80 0 8 9 7 14440 Singapor e 6 5 6 272 53 0 0 Slov a kia 4 21 2 68 2 0 8080 Sou th Af ri ca 08 6 000 1030 ( RS A ) 2 7 -1 1 2 58 9 301 ( outside RS A ) S pain 3 4 902 3 21 12 3 S weden 46 ( 0)8 619 217 0 Swi t ze rl a n d 41 (0)848 80 11 11 Ta i w a n 0800 010055 Tha il an d 6 6 (2) 661 400 0 Tu n i s i a 216 1 891 2 22 Tu r k e y 90 216 5 7 9 71 7 1 Ukr aine 7 (380 4 4) 4 90 -3 5 2 0 Unit ed Ar ab E m ir ates 9 7 1 4 883 845 4 Un ite d Kin gd om (UK ) 08 7 0 010 4 3 20 (na tional r at e ) fo r assi stan ce in inst all ing pr o duct ( f irst 3 0 day s) or with fault y p r o d uc t d u ri n g th e fu l l wa rra n t y p e ri o d 0906 4 7 0 08 7 0 ( 6 0 p/minut e) for assistance in sol vin g soft w a r e or usage pr obl ems Ve n e z u e l a 0 800 4 7 46 83 68 Vie t N a m 84 ( 0) 8 8 2 3 4 530
Ch apter 7 : T rouble sho oti ng and s uppo rt 88 He wl e t t -P a c k ard lim ited w arran t y sta tem ent T he HP pho tos mart 8 50 camer a c o mes wit h a one y e ar limited wa rr a nt y . z HP warr a nts to yo u , the end -us er cust omer , t hat HP hard war e, acce sso r ie s , so ft w ar e, and s uppli es w ill be f r ee fr om def e c ts in mate r ials an d wo rkmanship aft er the dat e o f pur cha se , f or the per iod s pecif ied a bov e . If H P r ecei ves notice of s u ch def ects dur ing t he war r anty per iod , HP will , at its opti on , eithe r r epair or r eplace pr oducts whi ch pr ov e t o be de fecti v e . R epl acement pr oducts ma y be either new or equivalent in performa nce to new . z HP w a r r an ts to yo u that HP s oftwar e will not fail t o e xec ute its pr ogrammin g instr ucti ons after the date o f pur cha se , f or the per iod spec if ie d abo ve , due t o def e ct s in mate r ial an d wo rkmanship w he n pr oper ly inst alled and u sed . I f HP r e c ei v es no tic e of suc h d ef e ct s dur ing the w arr anty pe r iod , HP wi ll r ep lace so ftwar e w hi ch does not e xe cut e its pr ogr am ming ins truct io ns due t o s u ch def ects . z HP does no t war r ant that the oper ation of HP pr oducts will be uninte rr upted or err o r f r ee. If HP is unabl e, wit h in a r easonabl e time , to r epair or r ep lace an y pr oduct t o a conditi on as w arr anted, y o u wil l be entitled to a re fund of the pu r chase pr ice upon pr ompt r etur n of the pr oduct . z HP pr oduc ts ma y co ntain r eman u f actur ed parts eq u i v alent to ne w in perf or mance or ma y hav e bee n su bj ect to inc i dental u se . z W ar r anty does no t a pply to de f ects r esulting f r om (a) impr oper or inade quat e main tenance or calibr atio n , (b) so f tw ar e , inte rf aci n g , parts or su ppli es not suppl ied b y HP , ( c) unaut hor i z e d modif icati on or misu se , (d) oper ati on outsid e o f the publ ished en vir onmental specifi c ati on s f or the pr o duct , or (e ) impr op er site pr epa r ation or maint enance . z T O T HE EXT ENT AL L OWED B Y L OC AL L A W , THE ABOVE W ARRANTIE S ARE EX CL US IVE AN D NO O THER W ARRANTY O R CON DITION, W H ETHER WR I T T EN O R O RA L , IS E XPRES SE D O R IMPLI ED A ND HP S PE C IFICA LL Y DISCL AIMS ANY IM P L IED W ARR ANTIES OR CONDIT I ONS OF MER CHANT AB I LITY , S A TI SF A CT OR Y QU ALI TY , AND FI TNE S S FOR A P AR TI CULAR
Ch apter 7 : T rouble sho oti ng and s uppo rt 89 P U RP OSE . Some countr ies, st ates or pr o v inces do n ot allo w limit ati ons o n the dur atio n of an impli ed war r anty , so the abo ve limitati on or e x c lusi on migh t not appl y to y ou . This w arr anty gi ves y ou specif ic leg al r ights an d you mi ght als o h av e othe r r ights tha t v ary f r o m country t o country , state t o sta te , o r pr ov ince t o pr o vince . z HPâs limit ed war r a nty is v a li d in an y c o untry or locality w he r e HP has a suppo r t p r ese nce f or this p r oduc t and w her e HP has mar k et ed t his pr od u ct . T he le ve l of w arr a n t y s ervi c e y ou r ecei ve ma y v ary accor ding to l ocal st andar ds. HP w ill no t alter f orm , f it or fu ncti on of the p r oduct t o mak e it oper ate in a country fo r whi ch it w as n e v er int ended to f uncti on fo r legal or r egulat ory r easons . z T O TH E EXT EN T AL L O WE D B Y L O CAL L A W , THE R EMED IES IN THI S W ARR A N TY S T A TEMENT ARE Y OUR S OLE AND EX CL US IVE REME DI E S. EX C EPT A S I NDI CA T ED A BO VE , IN N O EVEN T WIL L HP OR IT S SUP PLIER S BE LIABLE F OR L OS S OF D A T A OR FOR DIRECT , S P ECIAL , INCIDENT AL, CONSE Q UENTIAL (INCL U DING L OS T P R OFIT OR D A T A), O R O THER D A MA GE , WHETHER B AS ED IN CO NTR A C T , T ORT , OR O TH ER WISE . Some cou ntr ies, states or pr ovi nce s do not all ow th e ex c lusio n or li mi tat ion of in c ide ntal or conse quenti al damages, so the abo ve limit atio n or e x c lusi on m ay not a ppl y t o yo u. z TH E W AR R AN TY TE RMS C ONT A INE D IN THI S S T A TEMEN T , E X CEP T T O THE E XTENT L A WFUL L Y P ER MI TTED , DO NO T E XC LU D E, R EST R I C T O R M O D I F Y A N D A R E I N A D D IT I O N TO T H E MAND A T OR Y S T A TUT OR Y R I GHT S APP LICABLE T O THE S ALE OF THIS P ROD UCT T O Y O U . Her e ar e t he n ames and addr ess es of the HP en titie s whic h gr ant HPâs L imited W ar r anty in Ir el and and the U nited K ingdom: Ir e l and United K ingdom He wlett-P ack ar d Ir eland L td . He wl et t -P ack ar d Lt d. 30 H er bert Str e et Cain R oa d IR L -D ublin 2 Bracknell GB-B er ks R G12 1HN
Ch apter 7 : T rouble sho oti ng and s uppo rt 90 Y ou ma y also ha ve st atuto r y legal r ights agains t the seller on the basis of t he pur cha se agr ee men t in addition t o the man uf actur erâs w arr anty , which a r e not r e str icted b y this ma nuf act ur erâs warr a nty . R egul ato r y inf orm a tion F or r eg ul ator y i n fo rma tion, se e the r egu lator y_suppl ement .htm f ile on the so ftw ar e CD t hat ca me w ith yo ur cam er a .
Appe ndi x A: Batter ie s an d camer a acce ssor ie s 91 Appe ndi x A: Bat t er ies and ca mer a acce ss ories Managi ng bat te rie s When the b atter ies a r e r emov e d fr om th e cam e r a, the date and ti me sett ings a r e preserved for appro ximately 1 0 minutes. I f the camer a is w ithou t batte ri es f or lo nger than 10 m inute s , the c loc k is s et t o the la st da te and time at w hi ch the camer a w as used. Y ou may be pr ompt ed to update th e date a nd t ime. The follo wing bat tery lev els ar e dis pla yed on the ac tiv e d ispl a y . T h e camer a u se s f ou r AA batte r ie s . A cce pt ab le ba t t er ie s includ e photo -l ithi um , â ul tra â or â premiumâ g r ade alk a li ne , or re ch a rg e a b l e N i M H . F o r t h e b e s t re s u l t s w i th y o u r c a m era , us e photo -l ithi um or NiMH batteries. Icon Le vel Desc ri pti on F ull Batte r ies ha v e 7 0 -100 per cen t r emaining 2/3r d f ull Batt er ies ha ve 4 0- 7 0 per cent r emaining 1/3r d f ull Batter ies hav e 1 0 -40 per cent r emaining Empt y Ba tter i es h a ve less t han 10 p er c ent r emaining None N/A Cam er a is o pe r atin g on A C p o we r
92 h p p hotos mar t 850 userâ s ma nua l NO TE If y ou do not in tend to use yo u r cam er a f or e xten ded pe r io ds o f time (m o r e than a m on th), w e s t ro n g ly re c o m m e nd t h a t yo u rem ov e t h e ba t t e ri e s f ro m the c ame r a. Extending ba t ter y life z Use a n opt ional HP A C adapter or H P Ca mer a Do ck when unload ing pic t ur es to y our computer , pr inting , or conne cting to th e T V . z Use the v i e w f inder mi cr od isplay to f rame pi ctures inste ad of the I mage Display . Le a ve the Image Di spla y off when th e camer a is on . z M i n i m ize t h e us e of zoo m i n g. z Use th e Aut o f lash setting r ather tha n Fl a s h O n . Rech arg eab le bat ter ies Ni c k el Met al H y dr id e (NiMH) batte r ies can be r ec har ged b y u s in g a ba ttery c har ger . Ni MH batte ri es can also be r ec har ged in th e cam er a when the cam e r a is tur ned o ff and is connec ted t o an opti on al HP A C a dapt er o r HP C amer a Do c k . Batt er ies ar e fully r e cha r ge d v ia the opt ional HP A C adapter o r H P Camera Dock in 15 hours. NO TE Y o u m u st t u rn o f f t h e c a m e ra wh e n re c h a rg i n g t h e bat ter ies in th e camera . Some t hings to keep in m ind when usin g NiM H b at t er ies a r e: z Al wa y s r ec har ge all fo ur N iMH batte r i es at t he sa me time . One lo w- charged bat tery w il l reduce the bat tery li f e f o r a ll f our batte r ies in t he camer a .
Appe ndi x A: Batter ie s an d camer a acce ssor ie s 9 3 z F or N iMH ba tter ie s t o r eac h optim al capa c ity an d pe rf o r mance , the y shou ld f ir st be disc har ged com pl ete l y an d r ec ha r ged f o ur se par ate times . z A fte r l ong- te r m st o r age of N iMH ba tte ri es , r ec har ge th em befor e usi ng them again. B attery ce lls ge ner a lly disc h a r ge at about 1 per c ent per day at r o om temper ature . P o w e r conser v a tion T o conse rve batte ry po we r , the Image Displa y turn s o ff automatical l y i f th e re is no but ton activity f o r 60 seco nds. I f no buttons ar e pr esse d for 6 minutes, th e camera tu r ns off (un less it is p r inting or connected t o a comp ute r or TV). P urc ha sin g camera acces sories Y ou can pur cha se additi onal acce ssor ies f or y our camer a fr om y our lo cal r eta iler or onli ne a t w w w .h pshoppin g .c om . S ome acc essor ies f or the HP photosma rt 8 50 dig ital c amer a a r e lis ted b elo w: z Mem ory ca rdâ Secur e di git al (S D) or M ulti Medi aCard ® (12 8 MB is the ma ximum usab le card siz e). This pr od uct onl y supports t he use of Mu ltiM edia Card ® memory cards that have b een verified compliant to the MultiMediaCard® s p ecificatio n as of January 2000. Comp lian t Mul tiMed iaCar d® memo ry card s have the MultiMediaCa rd® logo o n the card. z HP A C pow er ada pt er (H P su pport s onl y H P A C adapters and ot her acc essor ies e xpressly appr o ved b y HP) : ⢠North Amer ica âC88 7 5A #001 ⢠Out side o f N ort h AmericaâC 88 7 5A #0 0 2
9 4 hp phot osma r t 850 userâs m anu al z HP Ph ot osmart 88 8 1 Ca mer a Dock: ⢠North Amer ica âC8881A #A2 L ⢠Outsid e of North A m er icaâC8881A #0 0 2 z HP audio /vi d eo ac cessor y cable (C63 2 4 - 61601) to connect to a televis ion ( T V ) . NO TE Y ou c an al so use an y Y - adapter audio cable with dual R CA plu gs o n on e en d an d a 1 /8 inc h (3 .17 5 mm) mini- ster eo jac k on the other end. Y ou w i ll also need an adapter plug that accept s a 1/ 8 inch (3.1 7 5 m m) jack an d f its int o a 3/3 2 inc h ( 2 . 38 mm ) j ac k . z HP Di gital C am e r a Acce sso ry Ki t (Y17 88A f o r the U n it e d S tat es and C anada , Y17 8 9A f or a ll o the r co untr ie s) . Cont ents in c lude : ⢠Cam er a ba g ⢠R ec har gea bl e NiMH ba t t er i es ⢠Batte ry ch ar ge r ⢠HP A C a dapter
Appe ndi x B: Came r a dock 9 5 Appe ndi x B: C am era doc k NO TE The HP Ca mer a Dock does not w or k w it hout A C p o w er . Be sur e to use ONL Y th e HP A C ad apter and th e cables that c ame with th e Ca mera D ock. 1 F oll ow t he s etu p instr uct i on s pr o v id ed wi th t he Ca me r a Doc k . T his inc lude s in st allin g the Doc k Ins ert o nto the dock , in stal ling (o ptiona l) rechargeable bat ter ies i n the c amera , connecting t he A C po we r sour ce , and connecting t he Ca mer a Do ck t o a com pute r , p rin te r , an d/or t ele vi sio n . 2 R emo ve an y ca ble s that ma y be att ached to th e c am e r a befor e pu tting it in t he d ock . 3 P lace the ca mer a in the Cam er a Do ck w i th th e r e ar o f the ca m er a f ac ing the f r on t o f the C amer a Doc k. Th e C a m era D o c k h a s t h re e I / O connect ors on th e bac k : âC onn ect s to th e televis ion âConne cts di r e ctly to USB -enabled HP De skJet an d Ph ot osma rt p r int er s âCon ne cts to you r c omputer Th er e i s a sl i di ng do or o ve r t he pr i nter and computer connect ors t hat pr ev en ts yo u fr om using bo th connecto rs at t he same time ( the Camer a Dock is not a USB hub) .
9 6 hp phot osma r t 850 userâs m anu al T he C ame r a Doc k h as a li ght n ear th e to p f r on t that pr o vi des b atte ry char ging status. A bl in ki ng light indic ates tha t bat ter ies ar e chargin g . NO TE Batter ie s w ill r echar ge onl y w hen the cam er a is t urned off . (Recha r gi ng will n ot occur when unloading ima ges t o a com pute r , pr i nting, or dis pla y in g a sl ideshow on a TV .) Th er e ar e t wo buttons on the fr ont that l ight up , s h ow in g the camer a is connect ed to t he ass oc i ated de v i ce . z The Sa ve/Pr int butto n acti v at es the connec tio n t o the com pute r o r the p r inte r , depen d ing on w hic h o f th ose de v ice s is co nnecte d to the do c k . z The TV bu tton ac tiv ates th e te le v isi on connec tion . The follo wing des cr ibes the functions of the dock bu t ton l ights. Sta te Indi ca ti on On The Ca mer a Doc k has po w er and a de vi ce is conne c ted. W hen y ou pr es s a button for o n e dev ice, the o t her but ton dev ice light t urns off . Blinki ng T he a ss o c iat ed de vi ce is acti ve . Off z T he a s soc ia ted de vi ce i s n ot con nect ed t o th e do ck . z The asso c iated dev ice is n ot availab le b ecause the ot her d e vic e i s active. z T h e d o c k h a s n o p ow e r , t h e c a m e ra i s t u r n e d o f f in the dock, or t her e is n o c amer a connecte d .
Appe ndi x B: Came r a dock 9 7 Unloading i m a ge s to a com pu ter using t h e doc k NO TE If y ou ar e u sing a M ac intosh comput er , y ou must fir s t chan ge th e US B c o nf ig uration set t ing to Disk Dr iv e in t he Setup m enu . F or mor e information , see USB c on f ig urat ion on page 6 7. 1 Check that the Cam er a Do ck is connecte d t o y our computer . 2 P lace the ca mer a i n t he Cam er a Dock. I t will tu r n on automat ically . 3 Pr ess t he Sav e /Prin t button on the dock. T h e HP I ma g e U n lo a d s of t wa re wi l l la un ch on you r c omp ut er . I f yo u ha ve s et the so ft w ar e to a ut omati c all y unl oad t he imag es in th e cam er a, the ima ges w ill a u tom ati call y unload t o t he com pute r . Ot herw ise , in t he We l c o m e scr e en , click Star t Un loa d . If there w er e an y images on the c amer a that ha d been sel ected i n the Shar e men u f or pr in ting or e -ma il, those actions a r e st arted af ter the images ha ve been unload ed to the computer . 4 When the u nloa d sc r ee n on the c ompu ter say s Fi n i s h e d , y our images hav e been sav ed a nd sh ar e d . Y ou c an no w tak e the camer a out of th e dock , or lea ve it ther e to r echa r ge the ca mera bat ter ies. Printin g im a ges usin g t he do c k 1 Check that t he Camera Dock is connec ted to y our pr i nter . (The do ck c an not be co nne ct ed direct ly to b oth a c ompu ter an d a p r inte r at the same time ) . 2 P lace the ca mer a i n t he Cam er a Dock. I t will tu r n on automat ically . 3 Pr ess t he Sav e /Prin t button on the do c k to star t the pr i nt dialo g .
98 h p p hotos mar t 850 userâ s ma nua l 4 A dj ust th e setting s in the Pr int Setup menu on the camer a to co m ple te th e pr i nti ng pr o cess. 5 When the pr i nti ng c omple tes, you c an take the ca mer a o ut of the dock , or leave it t her e to r echarge the ca mer a bat ter ies. D ispla yi ng ima ge s on a TV us ing t he doc k 1 Check that t he Camera Dock i s connec t e d t o your TV . 2 On the c am er a, check that the TV c o n fig u ra t io n o p ti o n i n the Set u p men u is se t cor r ectl y f or y our ar ea . See TV co nfiguratio n on page 6 8. 3 Re fer to the do cume ntatio n for th e T V to dete rmin e how to se t the TV t o ta k e vi deo inp u t f r om an ext er nal vi deo s our ce (your ca mer a ) in stead of the antenna or cable TV . 4 Pl a c e th e c a m e ra i n t h e C a m era D o c k. I t wi l l t u rn o n automat ically . 5 Pr ess th e TV b utto n on the d ock t o s tart d i s pl a y ing ima g e s on t he T V . The cam era start s a sl ideshow of ea ch i mage, pla ying an y atta che d a udi o c lip o r v i deo clip , and the n f ading to th e ne xt imag e . Y o u ca n also manua lly scr ol l th r oug h the i mages b y pr es sing t he butt ons on the came r a Cont r oller . NO TE The Image Display on the camera turns off when the camer a is connect ed to a T V . Ho we v er , y ou can s till u s e the Pla yb a c k an d Shar e men u s w hil e connect e d to the TV . (T he me nu s w ill dis pl ay on th e TV sc r een .)
Ap pend i x C : Sp ecificat ion s 99 Appe ndi x C: Spe c if ica t ions Fe a t u re Des cr ipti on Re so l ut io n 4.13 M P (2 384 b y 17 34 total p ix el count) 3 . 9 4 M P (2 304 by 1712 eff ectiv e pi xe l count) Sensor Diagonal 8.9 7 0 mm (1 /1.8-i nc h, 4: 3 for mat) CC D Color depth 3 6 -b it (12 b its b y 3 co lor s) Captu r e t ypes S till , Se lf- Time r , and V i deo Me mo ry 2 , 16 MB b y 16 wide (12 8 MB) in ter nal SDR AM Sl ot fo r a Sec ur e Di gital (S D) o r MultiMed iaCard® me mory car d (16 MB SD memor y card includ ed) . See Me mo ry ca r d capa c i t y on p age 10 2. Len s F o ca l leng th ⢠W id eâ7 .6 m m ⢠T elephotoâ 61 mm F- N u m b e r ⢠W id eâf/2 .8 t o f/1 1 ⢠T elep h oto âf/ 3 .1 t o f/ 11 Vie w find er Z o oming 1/4 V G A color sequential micr od ispla y vie w f inder with diopter cont r ol Zoom 8x optical , 7x digital z oo m
100 hp pho tosmart 8 50 use r âs manual Fo c us TT L a ut o f oc u s W ideâ100 mm to infinity Te l e p h o t o â 9 0 0 m m t o i n f i n i t y Fo c us s e t t i n gs Normal ( def au lt ) , Macro Shutter s peed 1/2000 to 16 seconds Fl a s h P op- up f las h assembly 3 second r e char ge 3 .5m at IS O 20 0 Fl a s h s e t t i n g s Au to ( de fau l t ) , Aut o wit h Re d -eye R e d uc t io n, F las h On, Night , Night with R ed -e ye Re d uct i on, Fla s h O ff Expo sur e Mode s etting s Auto (default) , Action, Land scape , P or tr ai t , Ap ertur e Pr ior it y , Sh utter Pr io r it y Exp osur e Compens ation can be set ma nually fr o m -3.0 to 3.0 E V in 0 .5 i n crem e nt s Wh ite Balance setting s A uto (default) , Su n , Shade , T u n gsten , Fl u o re s c e n t , M a n u a l AE Mete r ing setting s A v er ag e , Center - W eighted (defa u lt) , Spot IS O Speed setting s A uto (def ault ), 100, 200 Col or settings F u ll Color ( def aul t) , B lack & Wh ite, Sepia Re so l ut io n setting s 4MP - 2 2 7 2 x 171 2 ( defa u lt) 1MP - 113 6 x 848 Compr es si o n setting s - Best - Be t t er (d ef ault) - Good Ima ge Di sp la y 2 - in ch co lor CC FL backl i t , polysi lico n TF T L C D Fe a t u re Des cr ipti on
Ap pend i x C : Sp ecificat ion s 10 1 Self- Timer 10 se cond dela y A udio ca ptur e S till pi ctur es Up t o 30 seconds o f au dio can be ca ptur ed w it h ea ch s till pi ct ur e (ca n be tur ned o n/o ff in Setup me nu) Vid e o Audio c aptu r ed automatica lly with video Compr es si o n form at JP EG (EX IF ) f or still image s MPEG1 for vide o cl ips Po w e r 4 AA batteries (include d) Optional HP A C ad apter (6V , 20 00 mA ) : North Amer ica âC88 7 5 A #001 Outs ide of N ort h Ame r icaâ C88 7 5 A #0 02 O pt ion al H P P h otos m a rt 888 1 Ca me ra D o c k : North Amer ica âC8881A #A2 L Outsid e of North Ameri c aâC8881A #00 2 S l ow t ri ck l e re ch a rg i n g i n c a m era wi t h optional HP A C adapter or HP Camer a Dock (100% in 15 hours) A ut om ati c a dv anced po we r mana geme nt T he ca mer a ha s a max im um pow er con sumption o f 12 W at ts ( 1.9 amps ) In te rf a ces z US B to a compute r or US B to HP DeskJet and Photosm art pr inters z A ud io/ V i deo o ut t o TV z DC I N 6V z HP Cam er a D ock Fe a t u re Des cr ipti on
10 2 hp pho tosmart 8 50 use r âs manual Memo r y car d capac i t y The follow in g table list s th e appr o ximate numb er o f stil l i mages t ha t can be s to r ed on a 16 M B SD m em ory ca r d w hen the cam era is s et to the d iff e r en t Res o l ut io n and Compr ess ion sett ings av ai lable i n the Capt ure m en u (s ee p ag e 40 ). St and ard s z PTP tran sfer (1 5 7 4 0) z MSD C tr an sfe r z NT SC/P A L z JP EG z MPEG1 z DP OF 1.1 z EXI F 2 .2 z DCF 1 .0 Tr i p o d m o u n t Ye s Exte r nal Body Dimensions 11 0 mm (L ) b y 40 m m (W) by 7 5 mm (H) We i g h t 300 gr ams w itho ut batte r ie s Wa r r a n t y HP 1 y ear e x chang e w ar r anty 4MP - 2 2 7 2 x 171 2 Re so l ut io n 1 MP - 1 13 6 x 84 8 Re so l ut io n - Bes t Compr ess ion 5 im ages ( 2 .5 MB each) 13 images (1 MB each ) - Better Compr ess ion 13 images (1 MB each ) 35 i m a g e s (4 0 0 KB e a ch ) - Good Compr ess ion 26 i m a g e s (500 KB each) 71 images (200 KB each) Fe a t u re Des cr ipti on
In d e x 103 Index A AA batteries 91 AC power adapter conne ctor on camera 13 HP part number 101 purchasing 93 ac cess ories f or ca mera 93 active display, using 21 AE Me tering, setting 38 alkaline batteries 91 Aper ture Priority (A v) setting 35 audio clips play and adjust volume 47 play and review 47 reco rd 14 , 31, 35, 64 Audio Re cord setting 64 audio/video (TV) cable 94 conne ctor 61 conne ctor on camera 13 automatic exp o sur e, override 35 Av Aperture Priority settin g 35 B batteries door on camera 14 ext end l if e of 92 icons 9 1 install 15 leve ls 91 rechargeable 92 types to use 9 1 Best Comp res sion set ting 41 Better Compression setting 41 blinking lights on ca mera 10 , 13 on C ame ra Do ck 96 bo nus sof twar e 18 , 1 9 brackets on display screen 25 brightening an image 28 buttons on camera 10 on C ame ra Do ck 96 C calibrating color of images 37 came ra acce sso ries 93 Cam era Dock . Se e HP Camera Dock Camera So unds setting 65 camera specifications 99 came ra state s 19 came ra, turn on/ off 16 Capture menu, using 3 4 Capture mode, set 16 Colo r of ima ges, s etting 39 comp res sion f ormat 10 1 Compression, setti ng 40 compute r conn ect Ca mera D ock to 9 5 conn ect cam era to 59 conne ctions as a USB Mass Storage Dev ice Class (MSDC) 67 to Ca mera D ock 9 5 to com puter 59 to printer 60 to TV 61
104 Index conne ctors AC power adapter on camera 13 audio/video (TV) 13, 61 Camera Dock 14 HP C ame ra Do ck 95 Con troll er 11 cust omer suppor t 8 2 D darkeni ng an i m age 28 Date & T ime setting 17, 66 delete during Instant Review 25 from mem ory c ard 48 Digital Print O rder Format 53 digital zoom 3 3 dio pte r co ntro l 11, 23 disk drive, camera as 6 7 Display button 1 1 display images and video clips on TV 62 displays, using 21 dock. See HP C amer a Doc k DPOF 5 3 E e-m ail addresses, c ustomizing the Share menu 54 ima ges f rom c omp uter 6 0 images using Camera D ock 97 empty batte r ies icon 91 en lar ge imag e 48 erro r messa ges on camera 75 on computer 80 Exposure Com pensation, s e tting 28 Exposure Mode, setting 35 eye-start sensor, microdisplay 11, 6 6 Eye-Star t setting 66 F files Compression se tting 41 delete from memory card 48 DPOF 5 3 flas h pop-up flash assembly 12 rang e 10 0 set tin gs 2 9 using 29 Flash button 11 Fla sh O ff 3 0 F-num ber, settin g 36 focu s lock 26 rang e 10 0 setting 27 focus br ackets, using 25 Focus button 11 form at mem ory card 48 full batteries icon 91 G Good Compre ssio n sett ing 41 H help from cust omer s upport 82 HP AC power adapter conne ctor on camera 13 purchasing 93
105 Index HP Camera Dock buttons 96 conn ect to 1 4, 95 description 9 display to TV 9 8 Dock In sert 9, 95 printing from 97 sending e-mail f rom 97 unload images 97 HP Instant Share description 9, 51 Share button 11, 51 Share menu 52 turn on/ off 51 HP w eb sit es 82 I Ima ge D isp lay description 11 using 21 images AE Meter ing setting 38 brightening 28 Color setting 39 colo r ti nt 37 Compression se tting 40 darkeni ng 28 delete 48 Exposure Mode se tti ng 35 ISO Speed setting 39 magnify 48 number remaining 22 number saved on memory car d 40, 41, 10 2 Resolution setting 40 too dark/light 28 unloading c amera to compute r 59 unloading using Camera Dock 97 White Ba lance sett ing 3 6 install batteries 1 5 Camera Dock 9 lens cap tether 14 mem ory c ard 16 neck s tr ap 15 sof twa re 18, 19 Ins tan t Re vie w setting time to display 65 using 25 Ins tan t Sha re. See HP I nstant Share ISO Speed, s ettin g 39 L Langua g e s etting chan ge 68 choose at first startup 17 LED s ( light s) on C ame ra Do ck 96 LEDs (ligh ts) on cam era description 10 Powe r/Me mory 10 Self- Timer 13 lens cap tether attaching 1 4 mount on lens cap 14 lights on ca mera 10 , 13 on C ame ra Do ck 96 lock focus 26
106 Index M Macintosh compute r bo nus soft war e 19 conn ect to 5 9, 97 install sof tware 19 USB s etting on c amera 67 Ma cro fo cus settin g 11, 27 magnify image 48 Manual White B alance se tting 37 memory card Compression se tting, affect of 41 delete files 48 door 10 image capaci ty 40, 41, 1 0 2 install 16 pictures remaining 22 Resolution settin g, affect of 40 memory light 10 Menu/OK button 10 menus Capture 34 list of 1 9 Playback 45 Set up 63 Share 52 message s on camera 75 on computer 80 microdisplay in viewfinder description 11 dio pte r co ntro l 11, 23 Eye-Star t setting 66 us ing 21, 66 microphone 14 Mode sele ctor 16 mode, set 16 N neck strap attaching to c amera 15 mounts on camera 10 NiMH batte ries 91 Norm al focus setting 2 7 number of images on memory ca rd 4 0, 41, 102 number of pictures remaining on mem ory c ard 22 O OF F/Mo de sele ctor 12, 16 optical zoom 33 over-exposing an image 28 override automatic e xposure 3 5 P photo-lithium batteries 91 Picture Transf er Protocol 67 pictures instant review 25 sha re 5 1 take stills 2 3 play audio or vide o clips 4 7 Play button 1 1 Playback turn on/ off 11 using 43 Playback menu, using 45 Pop-up flash assembly 12 pop-up flash, using 29 power battery level icons 91 light 1 0 restorin g previous se ttings 20 specifications 1 01 turn on/ off 16
10 7 In de x power adapter, HP AC conne ctor on camera 13 purchasing 93 Powe r/Me mory lig ht 10 prev ious se tti ngs, re stori ng 20 print images dire ctly fro m ca mera 6 0 from comp uter 60 using Camera Doc k 97 using HP Instant Share 5 1 printer conn ect Ca mera D ock to 9 5 co nne ct to came ra 60 problems, tr ouble shooting 69 product support 8 2 PTP 67 R rang e Exp osu re Co mpe nsa tion 100 flas h 100 F-nu mb er 99 focu s 100 Ma cro focus settin g 27 Nor m al foc us se tti ng 27 rechargeable batteries 92 reco rd audio clips 14, 31, 35, 64 vid eo c lip s 3 2 recycl ing information 3 remaining pictur e s c ount 22 Resolution, s e tting 4 0 restorin g previous se ttings 20 revi ew p ictur es 2 5 reviewing images and video clip s 43 S Self-Timer light 13 Self- Timer mode set 16 use 24 set ting s, resto ri ng pre vious 2 0 Setu p menu, using 63 Share button 11 Share menu custo mize 54 description 52 e-mail service 5 4 printing option s 53 using 52 share pictures 51 Shutter button description 12 lock exposure and focus 25 Shutter Priority (T v ) s etting 35 shu tte r speed rang e 10 0 setting 36 slid esho w, di splay o n TV 62, 98 sof twa re, i nstal l 1 8, 19 soun ds o f cam era 65 space r emaining on me mor y car d 22 spe aker 12 specifications 9 9 state s of c amer a 19 Stil l mode set 16 use 23 still pictures, take 23 su pport f or us ers 82
108 Index T te chni cal s uppor t 82 tether to len s cap, attach ing 14 Time & D ate setting 17, 6 6 tripod m o unt 14 troubleshoot problems 69 turn on/ off auto audio recording 35 automatic audio recording 64 came ra po wer 16 came ra soun ds 65 HP Instant Share 51 Ima ge Di spl ay 11, 21 Ins tan t Revi ew 65 microdisplay in viewfinder 21, 66 mode 16 Playback 43 TV (television) button on Came ra Dock 9 6 cable to conn ect c amera 9 4 configuration s etting 68 conn ect Ca mera D ock to 9 5, 98 conn ect cam era to 61 conne ctor on camera 13 Tv Sh utter Priority s etting 35 U under-exposing an image 28 unloading image s came ra to compute r 59 using Camera Doc k 97 USB configuration s etting 67 conne ctor on camera 13 connector on Camera Doc k 95 V vid eo c lip s play and adjust volume 4 7 play and review 47 reco rd 32 Video mode set 16 use 32 viewfinder microdisplay description 11 dio pte r co ntro l 2 3 Eye-Star t setting 66 using 21, 66 viewing images and video clips 43 W wa rranty 88 warrant y upgrade options 84 web site s for HP 82 White Balance, setting 36 Windows computer bo nus so ftwa re 18 conne ct to 59, 97 install sof tware 18 Z zoom specifications 9 9 use optical or digital 3 3 Zoom Out/In b uttons 11
w w w .hp.com/photosmart Printed in Singa pore 200 2 Q2190-90010 *Q2146â90010*
T ra d em ar k an d c op yr i gh t in form a ti on © Cop y r igh t 2002 Hew lett - P ac k ard Compan y All ri ghts ar e r ese rv ed . No part o f this doc ument may be pho toco pi ed, r epr oduced , or tr ansl ated t o anoth er language w ithou t the p ri or w r it t en conse nt of He wlett - P ac k ar d Com pany . T he inf or mati on containe d in this doc ument is sub ject to c hange w ithout no tice . He wle t t -P ac k ar d shall not be lia ble for er r or s cont ained her ein o r for conse quenti al damag es in conne cti on wi th the f ur nishing , perf or mance , or u se of this mat er ial . Mi cr oso f t® and W indo ws® ar e U .S . r e gis te r ed tra demarks of Microsoft Corporat ion. Appl e , Mac int osh , and Mac ar e r egister ed tr ademar ks of Appl e Comp uter , Inc. Th e SD logo is a tr ademar k of the SD Car d Assoc iati o n . Materi als dis posal T his HP pr oduct con tains the f ollo wing mat er ial s th at might r equir e spec ial han dling at end-of -life : z Mer cury in the flu or escen t lamp in th e image L CD . z Alk aline mangane se di o x ide- zinc o r lithium-ir on disulf id e AA batte r ie s. z Le ad i n the sol der and so me c o mponent le ads. Dispos al of t his mater ial can be r egulat ed be c au se of en v ir onment al consi der ation s. F or dispos al or re cy clin g in for mati on , please co nt act yo ur l ocal a uthor ities or the Electr onic I ndustr ies Alli an ce (EIA ) (w w w . ei ae.or g) .
Ta b l e o f C o n t e n t s Chapt er 1: Getting st ar ted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Cam era par ts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Setu p . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Attac hing the lens ca p tether . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Attac hing th e nec k str ap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Instal ling the b atteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 In stallin g the m emory c ard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Tu rning on po wer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Ch oosin g t he lan guage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Sett i ng the date and time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 In stalling the soft ware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Windo ws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Mac int osh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Cam era state s and menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Resto ring previo us se ttings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Chapt er 2: T aking pictures and recording video clip s . . . . 21 Using the disp lays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Using the diop ter con trol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Tak ing s till pict ures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Using still mod e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Using self- timer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Using instant revie w . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Using the fo cus brack ets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Using focu s lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Using the fo cus sett ings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Using expo sure comp ensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Using the po p-up fla sh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Rec ord in g audi o . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Rec ord in g video clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
hp phot osma r t 850 userâs m anu al Using zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Op tical zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Digi tal z oom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Using the c apture m enu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 Ex posur e mo de . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35 White balan ce . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36 AE meter ing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 IS O sp eed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 Col or . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 Reso lution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 Com pression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 Setu p . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 Chapt er 3: Review ing images and video cli p s . . . . . . . . . . 43 Using playba c k . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43 Using the pla y b ack me nu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Pl ay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47 Dele te . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48 Magn ify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48 Setu p . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49 Chapt er 4: Using hp inst ant sha re . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Using the sh are menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52 Using hp ins tant share to prin t pic ture s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53 Using the hp in stant share e-mail se rvice . . . . . . . . . .54 Addin g, mod ifyin g, and remo ving e- mail ad dresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Sel ecting images to be e-ma iled . . . . . . . . . . . .56 Windo ws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57 Mac int osh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Chapt er 5: Unloading, printing, and displa ying images . . . 5 9 Unlo ading to a c omput er . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Prin ting im ages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Displa ying im ages on a T V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Chapt er 6: Adjusting the camera settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 3 Using the setu p me nu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Aud io re cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 In stant revie w . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 5 Cam era sou nds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 5 Eye- Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 6 Date & time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 USB con f igu ration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 TV co nfigur ation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 8 Lan guage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Chapt er 7: T roubleshooting and support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Prob lems and solutio ns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Err o r messag es . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Getting assistan ce . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Fi nding h elp on the we b . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 2 HP pro duct su ppor t . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 HP pho tos mart website . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 HP acce ssibility website . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 2 Cont acting hp custo mer supp ort . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 How hp can help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Be fore you ca ll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Obtaining s upport in the United State s . . . . . . . 83 Fr ee te lep hone su ppor t f or one ye ar . . . . . . 8 3 After the f irst year . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Upg rade d war r a nty option s . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Ob taining s u p port world wide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
hp phot osma r t 850 userâs m anu al Hewl ett-Packard limited warranty statem ent . . . . . . . .88 Regu latory infor mation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Appendix A: Batteries a nd came ra acce ssories . . . . . . . . . . 9 1 Man aging ba tteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91 Ex tending battery life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92 Rec harge able batter ies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92 Po wer co nservatio n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93 Pu rcha sing came ra a ccesso ries . . . . . . . . . . . . .93 Appendix B: Camera doc k . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Unl oadi ng i mage s to a com puter usin g th e doc k . . . . 9 7 Prin ting imag es us ing the dock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97 Displa y in g im ages on a TV using th e dock . . . . . . . . 98 Appendix C: S peci fi c ations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 9 Mem ory car d capa city . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
Ch apter 1: G et ti ng s tar te d 9 C hapter 1 : Get ting started Th e HP Pho tosmart 850 di g ital camera is a 4. 1 M egap ix el cam er a with 8x optica l z oom a nd 7x digit al z oom. T hi s came r a has an e x c itin g ne w f eatur e calle d HP Inst an t Shar e technolo gy . Wi t h HP I nst ant S hare , y ou can se lect im ages t o pr int o r e - mail autom atic ally th e next t im e y ou con ne ct the ca mer a to y o ur computer . Y ou ca n al so b ypas s the c om p u t er al together an d pr i nt the s ele cted pictur es direct l y to any HP D eskjet or Photosma rt printer s th at ar e U SB -enable d . Y ou can enhance yo ur e xper ience b y pur chasin g an HP Ph otosmart 8881 Camer a Dock. T he C amera Dock allow s y ou to easi ly do wnl oad im age s to a comp ute r , se nd imag es to a p r inte r or t ele vis io n, r ec har ge th e cam er a ba tter ie s, an d pr ovi de a con veni ent home for y our c amer a. NO TE A Doc k Inse r t is incl uded i n yo u r c a m e ra b ox. Th i s D o ck Ins ert enabl es yo u r c amer a (and other s of th e sa me mo del) t o u se t he HP C ame r a Doc k. P lea se d o not use it w ithou t the Ca mer a Do ck and DO NO T dis car d i t . Inst r uction s f or it s use ar e inc luded w ith t he C ame r a Do ck a s w ell as in App end ix B o f th is ma nual, s tar t i ng o n pa ge 9 5.
10 hp p ho tosmar t 850 user â s manual Camer a pa rts # Name Des cr ipti on 1N e c k s t r a p mount Allow s y ou to attach a ne ck strap (a mount is on each side of ca mer a) 2 P ow er/ Memory light Solid gr een âcamer a is on Blin king gr ee n â camer a is off and i s chargin g the bat teri es Blinki ng r e d âcame r a has insuf f ic ie nt pow er and is shutt ing dow n So li d ambe r âcame r a is r ea ding f r om or w r iting to the memo r y car d 3M e m o r y c a r d door Allow s access to ins e r t or r emov e th e memor y card 4 Men u/OK bu tto n Al lo w s y ou to disp la y the Captur e and Pl a yb a c k men us and t o sel ect menu o ptions 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Ch apter 1: G et ti ng s tar te d 1 1 5 Co nt r ol l er wi th a n d buttons Allow s you t o mov e through menu s an d imag es on th e Imag e Displa y , o r through t he Captur e me nu in t he vi ew fi n d e r m i cro d i s p l ay 6 Dis pla y button Tu r n s Live V iew on the Image D ispla y on and off 7 Pl ay button Tu r n s Pl a yb a c k on and of f 8 Shar e but ton Tu r n s t h e Shar e menu on and off 9 Ima ge D isplay Allow s y ou to f ram e pictur es an d vi d eo clip s u s ing Live V iew an d r e vi e w th em aft erw ar d in Pl ayb a c k , and to v ie w all the m enus 10 Ey e - start sens o r T u rns on th e micr o dis pla y i n the v ie wf inde r whe n it dete cts that y ou ar e loo king int o the vi e w f inde r 11 V ie w f inder with micr odi spla y Allow s you to fr am e pictures an d vi d eo clip s u s ing Live V iew , and to v ie w th e Captur e me nu 12 Di opte r con tr ol A dj usts the f oc us in th e mic r odispl a y . (I t does N O T af fect th e focu s of the imag e or v ide o cli p that you capture . ) 13 Fl a s h bu tton Se lec ts t he fl as h se tting w h en the pop - up flas h assem bly i s a cti vate d 14 Fo c u s but ton Tu r n s Macr o f ocu s on (for t aki ng c lose - up pictu r es ) and off 15 Z oom O u t button Z o oms out the len s to the w ide a ngl e posi tion 16 Z oom In button Z ooms in the lens t o th e te le ph ot o posi tion # Name Des cr ipti on
12 hp p ho tosmar t 850 user â s manual # Na me Des cr ipti on 1 Shu tter button T a k es a picture or starts and st ops re c o rd i n g a v id e o c l i p 2 OFF/Mode sele ctor T ur ns the came r a po w er o n an d off , an d se ts th e camer a mo de to St i ll , Self- Timer , or Vi d e o 3 S peak er P la y s came r a s ounds and a udi o c lips 4 P o p-up flas h re l e as e P ops up th e flash as sembly 5P o p - u p f l a s h as se m bly Pr o vi des ad dition al li ght t o im pr ov e pic t u r e - ta k i ng 2 3 4 5 1
Ch apter 1: G et ti ng s tar te d 1 3 # Name Des cr ipti on 1 Self-Timer light Blinks dur ing the 10 -second coun tdo wn be f or e taking a p ictu r e when u sing Sel f-T ime r mode. Al so tur ns on in l o w lig ht conditio ns to impr ov e auto focus. 2N e c k s t r a p mount Al lo w s y ou t o att ac h a n eck st r ap and a len s cap tether 3 USB co nnect or Al lo ws y ou t o connect a USB ca ble fr om the ca mer a to a USB -enabl ed comp uter o r pr int er 4 TV connecto r Al lo ws y ou to co nnect an opti o n al A udi o/Vi deo ca bl e fr om th e cam er a t o a T V 5 P ow er adapter connect or Al lo w s y ou t o connec t an opti onal H P A C po wer ad apter to the cam er a to oper a te the cam er a without batteri es 1 3 7 8 9 10 6 4 5 2
14 hp p ho tosmar t 850 user â s manual Setu p At tac hin g th e len s cap tet her 1 W ith the f r ont o f the cam er a fac ing y o u , in sert t he sm all lo op of the l ens cap te the r thr o ugh the ne c k str ap mo un t on t he r ight si de o f t he camer a . 2 Insert t he long lo op of the teth er t hr oug h the small loop and p ull to tig hten the k not . 3 Insert t he long lo op of the teth er through the len s c a p tether mount . 4 P ul l the long lo op o ver the si des of the lens cap a nd th en under the len s cap , as show n. P ull t o ti gh ten t he kno t. 6 Lens cap tether mount Allow s y ou to at tach a te ther to the lens cap 7 T ripo d moun t Allo w s you t o mount the camera t o a tripod 8 C ame r a Doc k connect or Allow s y ou to conn ect the c am e r a to the opt ional H P Ca mer a Do ck 9 B attery door Allow s access to ins ert and remo ve the b at teries 10 Micropho ne Reco r d s au dio c li ps # Name Des cr ipti on
Ch apter 1: G et ti ng s tar te d 1 5 At tac hin g th e nec k s tr ap Insert one end of the neck s tr ap t h rou g h a n ec k s t rap m o u nt. Th e n thread t he neck strap thr o ugh the plastic tab to s ecur e it. Repeat to attach the o th er end of the ne ck st r ap to t he othe r n eck strap mount . Insta lling t he bat teri es 1 W ith the f r on t o f the camer a f ac i ng you , op en the bat t er y door on the bot tom o f the cam era b y s lidi ng t he latch to t he r igh t an d pull ing the doo r to ward yo u . 2 I nsert the batte r ie s a s in dica ted insi de the d o o r . 3 Clo s e t he bat tery door by pushi ng t he door tow ar d the b ack o f th e c am er a a nd s lidi ng th e latch to the lef t . NO TE Fo r m o re i n f o rm a t i o n about b at t er ies, se e Mana ging batt er ie s on page 91 .
16 hp p ho tosmar t 850 user â s manual Insta lling t he memor y card 1 W ith the cam er a tur ned off and t he bac k o f th e ca mer a f ac ing y ou, open the me mo r y card door b y sl i d ing the door to the right . 2 Inse r t the memory card , ma king su r e th at it snaps into plac e. 3 Clo s e the memor y car d door . T o r emov e the memory c ar d, f irst mak e sur e t he c amer a i s turned of f . Ope n the memor y ca r d do or , then push th e memor y c ar d i n an d it will s p ri n g fro m t he c a m e ra. Tu r n i n g o n p ow e r T u rn the ca me r a o n b y rotat in g th e OFF/M o de sele ctor to th e mode yo u wa n t t o u s e : z â Still mode z â Self- Timer mod e z â Vid e o mode T he l en s e xte nds , t he Ima ge Di spl a y tu rns o n br ie fl y , an d th e P o w er/Memo r y l igh t turn s on s oli d gr een . NO TE If the P o wer/ Memor y light is bl inki ng red , t he bat ter ies ar e v ery lo w , and the c ame r a w ill sh ut do wn so on . Replace or r e char ge the ba tter ies, o r use a n optional HP A C ad apter to p o wer the c amera . F o r mor e i nfor mation about t he HP A C adapter , see Pu rch a s i n g c a m e ra acce sso r ies on page 9 3.
Ch apter 1: G et ti ng s tar te d 1 7 Cho os ing the langu age T h e f ir st time y ou tu r n t he came r a on , the fo llo w ing sc r e e n appea rs and pr ompt s y ou to choose a language. 1 Scr ol l to th e la ngu age th at you wan t by u s in g th e bu t to n s on the Contr o ller . 2 Pr ess t he blue Me n u/ O K b utton in the cen ter of the Contr o ller to sele ct the high lig hted langu age. Set ting t he da te and time The ca mer a has a clock that r ec or d s th e da te and ti me at which y ou ta ke eac h pi ctur e . T he f irst time y ou tur n t he came r a on , the follo wing screen appe ars a fter you choose the lang uage. 1 A dj ust the v alue o f the h ighli gh ted sele ction by using the buttons on the Contr o ller . 2 Pr es s th e bu t t ons o n the Contr ol ler to m ov e to the other se lections. R epea t st ep s one and tw o until the co rr ect date , time , a nd date/t im e f ormat ar e s et . NO TE In th e date/ti me format , mm =month , dd =da y , an d yyyy =year . 3 Pr ess t he Me n u/ OK bu tton wh en the pro per va lues a re ente red. The Image D isplay then turns off .
18 hp p ho tosmar t 850 user â s manual Insta lling t he soft w are T h e camer a s of t w ar e al lo w s y ou to unlo ad im ages f r om th e ca mer a , v ie w the m, p r int th em , an d e-m ail them . It also allo ws y ou to con f ig ur e t he Sha r e menu on the camer a. See Ch a p t er 4: Using hp instan t shar e on page 51 for in format ion abou t c onfig uring the Shar e menu on the ca mer a, and Chapt er 5: Unlo adi ng, pr i nting, and displ a y i ng im ages on page 5 9 f o r information about con necti ng t he ca mer a to a com puter o r pr i n te r . Win d o ws NO TE F or Window s c ompu ters , the HP Instant Shar e component of the HP Phot o & Im aging soft w a r e nee ds at least I nter net Explorer 5 .01 to function pr operly . 1 I nse rt the HP Pho t o & Ima ging so ft w ar e CD int o th e CD dri v e of your computer . Th e installat ion w indo w automatic ally appea rs . NO TE If the inst allati on w ind o w does no t a ppear , cli ck St ar t , and then click Ru n . T ype X:\S et up .e x e , wher e X is th e le tter o f y our CD dr i ve . 2 Cli ck Ne xt , an d th en f ollo w the on-sc r een ins tr uc tion s to in stal l the soft war e . Y our CD may also include b onu s soft w are f r om other manufacturer s. T o inst all a n y bonus soft war e : 1 Cli ck St ar t , c li ck Run , and in th e Open bo x , type X:\Bonus\setup .e xe (where X i s the let ter o f y our CD dr i ve) . 2 Cli ck OK , a nd th en fol lo w the on -s cr e en i nst ruct ions to in stal l the bonus soft war e.
Ch apter 1: G et ti ng s tar te d 1 9 Mac intosh 1 I nser t the H P Phot o & Ima ging so ft w ar e CD int o the CD dri v e of y our computer . 2 Double - click th e C D icon on th e com puter de sk top . 3 Do uble -cl i ck the inst aller i con, a n d t hen f o llo w the on-s cr een in struction s to in stal l the sof t w a r e . Y our CD may also include b onu s soft w are f r om other manufacturer s. T o inst all a n y bonus sof twar e : 1 Do ubl e -c li c k th e Bonu s fol d er i co n. 2 Double- clic k the ins taller icon for the bo n us soft war e. 3 F o llow the on- sc r een i nst r uctions to i nstall the soft w ar e. Camer a stat e s and menu s Y our c amer a has th r ee main st ates that allow yo u t o complete cer t a in t asks. E ach of th ese st ates has an assoc iated menu y ou can u se to adj ust came r a se tting s or perf or m ta sks in t hat st ate . z Captur e âA llows yo u to take still pictu res and r ecor d vi deo clip s . F or inf or mati on on u s in g Captur e , s ee Chapter 2 : T a k ing pi ctur es and r ecor d ing vi deo c lips on page 21 . z Pl ayb a ck â Allo ws y o u to r ev i e w th e stil l ima ges an d v ideo cli ps that you c aptu r e . For in f o r m ation on usi ng Playback , see Ch a pter 3: R ev ie w ing im ages a nd v ide o clip s on page 43. z Shar e âAll o ws y ou to u se the HP Ins tan t Shar e tec hnolog y t o sele ct image s in the camer a that w ill be au to mati call y pr o cess ed later wh en th e ca mera is c onn ecte d to your computer o r to a U SB -enable d HP pr i n ter . F or infor ma tion on using Shar e , see Chapt er 4: Usi ng hp instan t sha r e on page 51 .
Ch apter 1: G et ti ng s tar te d 2 0 Y our came r a also has a fourth m enu, the Setup m enu, which all ows y ou to ad j ust a n um ber of ca mer a s etti ngs. F or inf or mati on on using the Setup men u , see Chapter 6: Adjustin g the c a m e ra se ttings on page 63. R es toring p re vious set tin g s S om e of th e se t t i ngs t ha t you ca n cha n g e in t h e c a m era me nu s do not r emain s et a fter y o u tur n the camer a of f . Ho w e v er , y ou can r estor e the set ti n gs fr om the last ti me th e camera w as on and ha d at least on e non- default set tin g (which cou ld actual ly be se v er al po we r c yc le s ago ) b y hol ding do wn th e bl ue Me n u/ OK bu t t on whil e r ota ting th e OFF/M ode s el ecto r t o tur n the camer a on .
Ch apter 2: T a k in g pictu r es a nd rec ordi ng video cli ps 2 1 C hapter 2 : T akin g p ic tur es an d reco rdin g vi d eo c l ips Usi ng th e dis pl a y s Y our came r a h as t w o d isp la y s: z Mi cr odispla y in the v ie wfind er âAllow s you to f rame p ic tur es and v ide o c lips us in g Live View , and t o v ie w the Captur e me nu z Image Display âA ll ow s y ou t o f r ame p i ct ur es an d v id eo clip s using Live View , r ev iew images and video cl ips i n Pl ayb a ck , and to v ie w al l the men us NO TE Using th e Image Disp la y consume s a lot of ba ttery pow er . T o pr eser v e b at ter ies, use the micr od isplay in stead. T o ac tiv ate Live View on the: z Micr od is play , s im ply look thr oug h the v iewfinder . The e ye -star t sen sor belo w t he vie w finder de tects that you ar e loo k ing thr ough the v ie w f inder and au tomati call y turns o n the m ic r o dis play . z Image Display , pr es s the Disp la y button. NO TE If the mic r odisp la y d o es no t tur n on a ut omati call y whe n y ou look th r ough the v ie w f inder , y ou may nee d to cha nge the Eye - Sta rt se t ting in t he Setup menu . Se e Eye - St ar t on pa ge 66. T o adjust th e focu s i n th e micr o di splay , se e U sing the dio pte r contr ol on page 2 3.
2 2 hp phot osma r t 850 userâs m anu al The follo wing tabl e describes th e information th at is disp la y e d in th e Live Vi ew scr e en o f the activ e dis pla y when the c amer a sett ings ar e at their default values. # Ico n Descr ipt ion 1 12 R emaining p ictur es coun t or v ideo c lip r ecor ding time (de pend s on ho w m uc h space is r emaining on the memory car d) 2 4 MP Re sol ut ion setting (defau lt is 4 M P - 2272 x 1712 pi x els) and Compression setting (default is Better , which is indicated by the two star s) 3 or âBattery leve l when u sing batteries (actua l icon shown depe nds on th e state of y our camera ba tte ries ) âA C po w er when using the optional H P A C a da pte r o r C ame r a D ock 4 or â Flash Off when the pop- up fl ash is not activated â Auto (default fla sh se tting) when the po p-u p fla sh is activ ate d 5 F o cu s br ackets ( see Usi ng t he focu s brack ets on page 25) 1 2 4 5 3 A A
Ch apter 2: T a k in g pictu r es a nd rec ordi ng video cli ps 2 3 NO TE If you change other camera se tting s in the Capt ure menu , icons for those settings w ill als o be display ed across the top and b ottom of the Live View sc reen . For more information, see U sing the ca pture menu on pag e 34 . Usin g th e dio pter control Th e rubber e ye piece on t he v ie w f inder i s a di opter c on tr ol t hat y ou can tu rn to adj u st the foc us in the mi cr odispl ay . Ho w ev er , th e dio pter con tr ol ha s NO eff e c t on the ac tual p ictur e y ou t ak e or v ide o c li p y ou r e cor d. T akin g sti ll p ic tures You can take a picture a lmost an y time th e cam era is on, reg ardless of what is be in g shown on th e active display. Your came r a has two mo des for ta king still pictures : Still mode an d Sel f - T imer mode . Using still mode 1 R o ta te the OFF/Mode sel ect or to Still mode . 2 F rame the su bject for you r pi cture in the acti ve displ ay. 3 H ol d t he cam er a st ead y an d pr ess the Shu t t er butt on h al f way d own. Th e c a m e r a measu r es a nd then locks t he f oc u s and e xpo sur e. 4 Pr ess the Sh utter b utto n a ll the w ay down to tak e the picture . T he imag e is dis pla y e d fo r s ev er al seco nds in Ins tan t R e vi e w on the act i v e dis pl a y . Se e Using insta nt r e vi ew on pag e 2 5.
2 4 hp phot osma r t 850 userâs m anu al Using s elf- timer mode In Se lf-Ti mer mode, the camera ta kes the picture 10 se conds after you press the Sh utter b utton all the way down. 1 Secure th e ca m era to a tripod or set it o n a s tab le su rf ace. 2 R o ta te the OFF/Mode selecto r to Self- Timer mode . 3 Frame t he s ubjec t for you r pic ture in the active displa y. 4 P ress th e Shutte r bu tto n halfw a y dow n. The ca mer a m easures and th en locks the fo c us an d e xposu r e . The camer a wi ll hold the se setting s f or the 10 se cond s u ntil it ta k e s th e pict ur e. NO TE If you imme diate l y press the Shu tte r b utton all the way down instead, the camera lo cks focus and exposure just bef ore the en d of th e 10- seco nd co untd own. T his is use ful when o ne or more su bject s wil l be en terin g the p ict ure during the 10-se cond coun tdown period. 5 Pr ess th e Shu t te r butt on a ll the w a y do wn . A 10-secon d coun tdo wn ap pears on th e ac tiv e displa y . Th e Self - Tim er light on the fr ont of the ca mer a bl inks slo wly f or 7 sec onds an d th e n qu ic k ly fo r t he fi na l 3 se c on d s b efo r e th e ca m era ta k es the pictu r e. A fte r t he p i c tur e is t ak en , t h e im ag e is di sp la y ed f o r se v er al se conds in Ins ta nt R e vi e w o n the a cti v e d ispla y . See Us in g instan t r e vi ew on p age 25 .
Ch apter 2: T a k in g pictu r es a nd rec ordi ng video cli ps 25 Using ins tant r e vie w After y ou ta k e a st il l pi c tur e, the act i ve dis pla y s ho ws the i mage f or se v er a l secon ds in Ins ta nt R e v i e w w hile t he im a ge is being sa v e d to th e m em ory car d. Y ou ca n dele te t he imag e dur ing Instant R ev ie w b y pr essi ng th e Men u/OK bu tto n . Yo u c a n e x t e n d Ins t ant R e v ie w by h o l d i n g d ow n t h e Shutte r bu tto n afte r y ou t ak e the p ictu r e . Y ou ca n also se t ho w l ong Instant R ev ie w is di splay e d or turn it off with the Instant R e vi ew option in the Setup m enu . F or mor e i nfor m ation , see Ins t ant revi e w on pag e 6 5. Yo u c a n a l s o u s e Pl ayb a c k to r evie w the im age s you h ave ta k en. S ee U sing pla yba c k on pa ge 4 3. Using t he f oc us b rac k ets The t w o br ackets in the midd le of the a ctiv e d ispl a y scr e en sh ow th e f oc u s r e g io n f or t he pi ctur e y ou ar e t aki ng or t he vi d e o c l i p yo u a re re c o rd i n g. W h e n yo u p re s s t h e Shutter button h alf w ay do wn , th e cam er a m easur es an d then lock s the f oc u s us ing t his r egi on . T he f oc us b r ac ke ts tur n gr een w he n the ima ge is in f oc us and th e camer a can loc k t he foc us , b ut tur n r e d when th e c amer a i s u nable to focu s. If the f ocu s br ack ets turn r ed , r el ease t he S h utter b u tto n , r e -fr ame the subject f or your pic tu r e or v ideo cli p , and then pr ess the Shu t t er b u t to n h a l f way d own a g ai n . I f th e fo cu s br ack ets contin ue t o tur n r ed afte r se v er al tr ie s, t he li ghting ma y be t oo lo w , or t her e m a y not be en oug h co n tr ast in t he f oc us r e gi on . T ry u s ing Fo c u s L o c k . See Using f o c us l ock on page 2 6.
2 6 hp phot osma r t 850 userâs m anu al If t he focus br ack et s turn r e d and the Ma cr o ico n is blinking on th e act i ve d isplay , either the ca m er a is set to Ma c r o fo cus but d etec ts th e focus is f urt her a wa y tha n the macr o (close - up) ra n g e, o r th e c a m e ra i s s e t t o Nor mal f ocu s bu t de tects the foc us is c los e r t h an t he n o rma l ran ge. For mo r e i nfo rma t ion on the f o c us sett ings an d th eir r espe ctiv e di stanc e ranges, se e Using the f ocu s settings on p age 2 7. NO TE Wh en s et to Mac r o focus, the ca mera will not tak e a p ic tur e if it c ann ot f ind f oc us . Ho we ve r , w hen set t o Nor m a l f oc u s (th e de f aul t) , t he came r a w ill s till t ak e a p ic tur e if it ca nnot f ind f oc us . Using f o cus loc k Fo c u s L o c k all ow s y ou t o f oc us o n a su b jec t th at is n ot in t he center of the picture , or to capt ur e action s hots mor e quickl y by pr e-f oc u sing in the ar ea w her e ac ti on w ill o cc ur . Y ou can als o use Fo cu s L o c k t o he lp a chi e v e f oc us in l o w li ghti n g or lo w con tr as t situ atio ns. 1 F r a me the s u bject f or y ou r p ictu r e within the foc us br ack et s in th e a cti ve displ a y . 2 Press the Shu t t er b u t to n h a l f way d own to l o ck t he exp o s ure and f o c us. 3 Cont inu e to ho ld th e Shutter but ton hal fwa y do wn whi le you r e -fr a me or adju st y our subject f or pr oper posi tioning . 4 Pr ess t he Shutter but ton a ll t he way down to ta k e the pictu r e .
Ch apter 2: T a k in g pictu r es a nd rec ordi ng video cli ps 2 7 Using t he f oc us s et ting s Yo u c a n u s e t h e Ma c r o fo cus se tting on the camer a f or t aking close - up pi ctures. The Fo c u s butt on le ts y ou t oggle bet ween t he Nor mal and Ma c r o f ocu s setting s. Nor mal is t he de f au lt f ocu s se t ting on the camer a . NO TE If t he came r a is z oomed in pa st 3 . 5x w hen y ou s et t he camer a to Ma c r o f oc u s, t he ca mer a w ill a ut oma ti ca ll y z oom bac k t o 3 .5x . Se e Usi ng zoo m on pa ge 3 3 . NO TE Wh en s et to Mac r o focus, the ca mera will not tak e a pict u re i f it c a n no t fi n d fo cus ( th e fo cus b r ac k e t s tu rn r e d i n t he cen t er of t he acti ve disp la y) . Ho w e ve r , w hen s et t o Nor m a l f oc us , t he came r a wil l still t ak e a pi ctur e if it canno t f ind f o c u s. Ico n Setting Desc rip tion None No r mal Use when t aki ng pi ctu r es of s u bjects greater than 0.8 m (31.5 inches) awa y . A uto fo cu s is lim it ed t o a d ist anc e r ang e o f 0. 8 m (31 . 5 in c he s) t o inf in ity . Mac r o Use when taking close- u p pic tu r es of subj e cts less than 0.8 m ( 31. 5 inches) aw a y . Auto foc us i s lim ite d to a di stan ce range of 0.1 - 0.8 m ( 4 - 31.5 inches) , and z oom po si ti on is li mi ted to a range of 1 x to 3 .5 x .
28 h p p hotos mar t 850 userâ s ma nua l Using e xpo sur e com pensa tion In difficul t lighting conditions, yo u can us e Exposure Comp ens at ion to override the automatic exposure setting that the cam era makes . Exposu re Com p en sation settings ra nge fr om -3.0 EV (E xposu re Va lue) to re duce t he exp osur e of t he imag e (darke ning it), to 3.0 EV to increase the ex posure o f the i mage ( brigh tening it) . By default, Exposure C ompensation is set t o 0 ( zero ) an d n o in dica tion is given o n the active d isplay. When Live View is turn ed on and y ou press the buttons on th e Cont r ol ler , a m e te r appears in t h e midd le of th e act iv e di spl ay, an d t he Exposure Comp ens at ion va lue i s sh own on the bottom of the display. When yo u ha ve not c hanged Exposu re Com pensation fo r 2 s e co nds, the mete r disa ppears, but the value remains at the bottom of th e screen flanked by arro ws (unle ss it has been set to 0).
Ch apter 2: T a k in g pictu r es a nd rec ordi ng video cli ps 29 Using th e pop-u p f la sh NO TE Y ou cann ot us e the f lash w hile r e co r ding v ideo c l ips . The flas h o n you r c a mera i s tu rne d o ff and th e fl as h w ill not f ir e un til y ou man uall y pop it up b y sl idin g the pop-u p f l a sh r e lease on top of the c amer a. When the f lash is poppe d -up , it begi ns to charge and is autom atica lly set to the Au to fla s h s etting . T o ch ange th e f l a s h set ti ng , pr ess the Fl a s h bu t ton on t he b ac k of the came r a unti l th e desi r e d set ti ng appe ars on the a cti ve di splay . The follo wing tabl e describes the dif f eren t flash set tings. NO TE If y ou c han ge th e fl ash settin g , t he c ame r a w ill r ema in in th at s etting un til y ou c hang e it or tur n off the ca mer a . Ic on Setting Desc rip tion Au to The camera me asures lig ht and uses the flash if n ecessary . Au to wi th Re d -eye Re d uct i on The camera me a s ur es light and uses the f l a s h wi t h re d - ey e red u c t i o n i f n e c e s s a r y . A A
Ch apter 2: T a k in g pictu r es a nd rec ordi ng video cli ps 3 0 NO TE Only the Fl a s h O n setting is a va ila ble w hen y ou se t th e Exposur e Mode in the Captu r e men u t o e ithe r Ap er t u re Pr ior it y or Shutter P r ior it y . Se e Expo sur e mode on page 35. T o tu r n t he f lash off , pr ess t he po p-up flash assemb ly do wn until it sna ps sh ut . W hen the f lash is o ff , the Fl a s h O f f ico n appe ars at th e top of th e Live V iew sc r een . Fl a s h O n Th e came ra always flas hes. If the li ght is be hind your sub ject, yo u can use th is setting to increase the light o n the front of your subject. (This is called âf ill-flash.â) Night The camera fires the flash to illuminate objects in the foreground. It th e n contin ues to expos e as if th e flas h h a d not fired to ga ther the backgr ound. Night w ith Re d -eye Re d uct i on T he camera f ires the fl ash, using re d-eye reduction if necessary, to illuminate objects in the foreground. It th e n contin ues to expos e as if th e flas h h a d not fired to ga ther the backgr ound. Ic on Setting Desc rip tion
Ch apter 2: T a k in g pictu r es a nd rec ordi ng video cli ps 3 1 Recordin g au dio Y ou can set t he camer a to a ut omati call y r ecor d audi o clip s that ar e at tached to the sti ll pi ct ures y ou ta k e. An audio cli p c an b e a max imum of 30 sec onds long . 1 Set Au d io Rec o rd to On in the Set u p men u . ( Se e Usi ng t he setup m enu on p age 6 3 .) 2 Pr ess t he Shu t t er but ton h alf w ay do wn to be gin audio r eco r ding (f oc us an d e xposu r e als o l oc k) . A mi cr oph o n e and aud io counter app e ar at the top of the act i ve di splay . 3 Pr ess t he Shutter but ton a ll t he way down to ta k e the pictu r e . 4 Co nti nue to ho ld the Shutte r button do wn to r e cord the audio cli p , then r ele ase the Shut te r b utton to st op r ecor ding . Audi o r e cord in g stops either when you r elease the Sh utter button, Instant Re vi e w en ds, the maximum audio clip length o f 30 sec ond s is r eac hed , o r t he me mory ca r d is f ull , wh ic he v er come s fir st . Y o u can u se Pla yb a c k to r ev iew the audio cli ps you h av e re c o rd e d. S e e Using pla ybac k on page 43 .
Ch apter 2: T a k in g pictu r es a nd rec ordi ng video cli ps 3 2 Record ing vi deo c lip s A v i de o clip in clu de s aud io an d can be a max im um o f 60 se c ond s l o ng . 1 R o tate th e OFF/Mod e sel ector to Vid e o mode. 2 F r a me the s u bject for y ou r v ideo in th e a cti ve displ a y . 3 Pres s the Shutter bu t t on ha lfw a y do w n . T he ca mer a me asu r es an d then locks t he foc us. NO TE Un like sti ll pictures, exposu r e is n ot lock ed for a video cli p wh en you pr ess t he Shu t t er but ton half w ay do wn. Ins tead , e xp osur e i s conti nual l y measu r ed a nd ad j uste d d u ri n g v id e o re c o rd i n g . 4 Pr ess t he Shu t t er bu t t on all the w a y do wn an d r ele ase it t o s ta r t re c o rd i n g vi d e o. REC an d the v i deo coun te r appe ar a t the top of th e act i ve d isplay . 5 Pr es s the Shutter bu t t on all the w ay do wn ag ain to st op re c o rd i n g vid e o. Th e camera au to matically stops r ecording whe n th e max i mum vid eo cl ip l en g t h o f 6 0 se c o nd s i s r e a ch e d o r t h e m em or y c ard is f u ll , whiche ver comes f i r st . After r e cording h as stopped, th e f irst f r ame of th e v i deo clip an d Pr oc es sing ... ap p e a r on th e activ e display . Wh ile i t is pr o cess ing, y ou ca n delet e the video c l i p by p r e s s i n g t h e Menu/ OK but t on. Y ou can use Pl ayb a ck to r e vi e w the v ide o c lip s y ou ha v e tak en . See Usi ng pl a yb ack on page 43. NO TE Moto r no ise f r om opti cal z ooming m ay b e r ecor ded in the audio por tion of a vide o clip . T h u s, for best audio qu alit y , do no t u se t he z oom w hile r ecor ding v i deo .
Ch apter 2: T a k in g pictu r es a nd rec ordi ng video cli ps 33 Usi n g zoo m O ptical zoom Pr ess t he Zo o m O u t and Zoom In but tons to mo ve t he lens bet ween w ide a ngle and telephoto po sition s (1 x to 8x) . NO TE If you set the c am er a to Mac r o fo cus , you c an o n ly zo o m t o 3 .5 x. Dig ital z oom NO TE Y ou ca nn ot use digi t al z o om while recor ding vi d e o c l i p s . 1 Pr ess t he Z oom in button t o optically z o om in to the max imum level , then release the but ton . 2 Press the Zoo m i n but ton ag ain and hold it u n ti l you reach the de sir ed si z e in t he ac ti ve displ ay . A re d b o rd er s u rro u n d s t h e a re a of the ima ge th at will be captu r ed. The Res ol u t io n nu mbe r in t he upper -left c or ner of the s cr e en als o becom es small er as y ou di gita ll y z oom . F or e x ampl e , 2. 3 app ears in pl ace of 4 MP , indica ting t hat t he imag e is being cr op pe d do wn to a si ze of 2 .3 M egapi x e ls. 3 M a ke s u re t h e re d b o rd er f ram e s yo u r s u bj e c t, a nd t h e n pr ess the Shu t t er but ton to take th e pi c tu r e. T o tu r n digi tal z o om off and return to optical z o om , press the Zo o m O u t but ton until d i gita l z oom ing stops. R ele ase the button, and then pr ess the but ton aga in .
Ch apter 2: T a k in g pictu r es a nd rec ordi ng video cli ps 34 Usin g th e ca pture menu The Capt ure men u allow s you to adjust vari ous cam er a sett ings t hat aff ect th e q ualiti es o f the imag es an d v i deo cl ips y ou cap tur e w ith y our came r a , such as th e ir e xpo sur e , colo r , an d re s ol u t io n . NO TE Y our cam er a can be in a n y mode ( Sti l l , Self- Timer , or Vid e o ) wh en u sing t he Captu r e menu options, but some menu opt ions w i ll b e g r ay e d-out when in Vid e o mo de . 1 To d i s p l a y t h e Capture men u , pr ess th e Menu / OK bu t t on at an y time w hen the Ima ge Disp la y is tur ned off , or whe n Live Vie w is tur ned o n in t he ac ti ve displ ay . 2 Us e the butto ns on th e Co nt r o l ler to scr ol l through t he Capture menu options. 3 E ither press the Me n u/ OK but ton to selec t a high lighted option and displ a y its s u b- menu , or use the but tons on the Contr oller to cha nge the setting for the highlighted option without go ing to its sub-menu . 4 W ithin a su b-men u , u se t he b u tton s on th e Contr ol ler an d the Me n u /OK bu t t on t o c han ge t he se tting f or the Capt ur e menu opt ion . 5 To e x i t t h e Capt ur e men u , highl ight the EXIT CAPTURE MENU opt i o n a nd press the Men u/ OK button. Scr een one Scr een t w o
Ch apter 2: T a k in g pictu r es a nd rec ordi ng video cli ps 35 Exposure mod e Thi s Captu re men u opt i on allow s you to ov err ide th e autom at i c exp osu r e se ttings o n the came r a. T he Exp os ur e Mode setting d ete rmines ho w the camer a se l e cts t he aper tur e a nd shu t ter s pee d f or the giv en scene br igh tne ss. The defau l t Expo sur e Mod e setting is Au to . T he Expo sur e Mode se tting r ese ts to Au to w he n y ou tu r n t he came r a off . When y o u set Ex p osur e Mode to Action , Lands cape , or Po r t r a i t , th e IS O S pe ed menu option is gr ay ed -out . Ico n Setting Description None Aut o Cam e ra automat ically selec ts a n aper tur e an d sh utte r sp eed Act i on Ca m era bi a se s t owa rd fa s t e r s h u t t e r spee ds and higher ISO spe eds to stop action Lan dsc ape Ca m e ra bi a s es t owa rd s m a l l er ap e r t u re s and lo wer ISO sp eed s for bet ter dept h o f f oc us and q uality Po r t r a i t Ca m e ra bi a s e s t owa rd wi d e r ap e r t u re s t o blu r th e bac k gr ou nd an d u se s lo w er contr ast fo r pr ofessional-lo o ki ng portraits Av Aper tu r e Pr i o r ity Y ou select a specif ic apert ure v alu e in Live View , then t he came r a sel ects th e appr opri ate shutter sp eed Tv Shutter Pr i o r ity Y ou sele ct a sp ecific shut ter sp eed i n Live View , then t he came r a sel ects th e appr op r iate apert ur e value
Ch apter 2: T a k in g pictu r es a nd rec ordi ng video cli ps 36 When y o u set Ex p osur e Mode to Ap e r t u re P ri o ri t y or S h utter Pr ior it y , the F-number and sh ut ter spee d ar e di splay ed in Live Vie w , and y ou can u se the b uttons on the Co nt r o l le r to ad j u st th e valu es. White balan ce In som e cases, i t ma y be necess ar y to pr e - set the l igh t sou r ce s o the camer a can r epr oduce colo r s mor e accurately . Thi s Capture menu opt i on determ i nes h o w the c am er a w i l l adju st t he color of the ima ge to match the s cen e il lu min a nce. Set the Whi te B al an ce acco r ding t o the situat io ns e xplain ed in the f ol lo wing table . The default Wh ite Ba lanc e setting is Auto . The Whit e Ba lan ce sett ing resets to Aut o w he n y ou tur n t he camer a off . Icon Setting Des cr ipti on None A uto Ca m e r a automa tically identifies and cor rects for s cene ill uminanc e Sun Camera bala nces c olor as suming it is outdoor s under sun or br ight c loud y conditi ons Shade Camera bala nces c olor as suming it is outdoors in shad e , t w ilig h t , or dark clou dy co ndi tion s Tu n g s t e n Camera bala nces c olor as suming incandescen t or halogen li g h ting (typ i call y f oun d in hom es)
Ch apter 2: T a k in g pictu r es a nd rec ordi ng video cli ps 3 7 The Man ual W hite Balan ce scr een d i s p l a y s w h e n y o u s e l e c t t h e Manu al se tting . The Live V iew por ti on o f the scr een sh o ws the c olor tint fr om the pr ev ious Ma n u a l W hi te Ba l an ce se tting that w as m ade . NO TE To r e s t o r e t h e p r e v i o u s Ma n ua l W hi te Ba la nc e se tting , sim ply pr ess the Men u/OK but t on in th e M an ual Whit e Balance scr e en wi thout pr ess ing the Sh utter button. To c h a n g e t h e Ma nu a l Whi te B ala nce se tting , po int t he came r a at a whi te tar get , and then pr ess t he Shutter butto n (th e came r a wi l l n ot t a k e a pi c tu re) . T h e camer a th en cal c ulate s a c us tom Whit e Balance set ti n g based on the region ins i d e the f o c us brac kets. When the calc ulation is comp lete , the col or tin t in Li v e View ch ange s t o match the new Man ua l Whit e Ba lan ce setting . Y ou can r epeat this mu ltipl e times until y ou get the de sir ed Whi te B ala nce . When y ou a r e sat isfied w ith the Manu al set ti ng y ou hav e ma de , pr ess the Men u/OK butt on to e x i t th e Man u al Whi te B ala nce s cre e n a n d re t u rn t o t h e Captur e menu . Fl u o re s c e n t Camera bala nces c olor as suming f l uo r escen t li ghting Man ual Came r a ca lc u lates a custom Wh i te Balance base d on y our t ar ge t imag e (see th e f oll ow ing i nf or ma tio n) Icon Setting Des cr ipti on
Ch apter 2: T a k in g pictu r es a nd rec ordi ng video cli ps 38 AE m etering Thi s Capt ure me nu op ti on deter m ines which r e gion of the p ic tur e w ill be u sed to mea sur e the expos ure . The defau l t AE Me ter ing setting is Center - W eighted . The AE Mete rin g se tting r ese ts to Cente r - W ei g hted w hen y ou t ur n the ca mer a off . Icon Setting Des cr ipti on Ave ra g e Camera uses t he enti r e s cene r e gion to m easure a nd c alculate ex po s ure None Center - W ei g hted Camera uses l ar g e a r e a i n t h e ce n ter of the scene r eg ion t o me asur e and ca lc u late e x posu r e Sp ot Camera uses a smal l area in t he ce n ter of the scene r eg ion t o me asur e and ca lc u late e x posu r e
Ch apter 2: T a k in g pictu r es a nd rec ordi ng video cli ps 39 I S O s peed Thi s Captu re men u opt i on allow s you to adjust the sen sit i vit y of th e camera to l ight. Because higher IS O n u mbers allow higher shutter speed s, u se a high er IS O Speed setting when tak ing pi ctu r es i n dark ar e as or p ic tur es of fast mov i ng ob je cts. In c ontr ast , be cause lower ISO numb ers r es u l t in sl o w er sh utte r speeds , u se a l ow er ISO Sp e ed setting to capt ur e b ett er qual ity images w ith less â n o i se . â NO TE Y ou m a y wan t to use a tr ipod whe n setting the came r a to I S0 100 beca us e of the r esu ltin g slo w sh utter spe e d . The defau l t I S O Sp eed s et tin g is AU TO , wh ic h a l lows th e cam era to pic k the b est IS O Speed f or th e scene. The IS O Sp ee d setting r es ets t o AU T O wh en y o u turn the camera off . When y o u set Ex p osur e Mode to Action , Lands cape , or Po r t r a i t , th e IS O S pe ed menu option is gr ay ed -out , a nd the camer a au tomati call y sele cts th e best I S O S peed sett ing . Colo r Thi s Captu re men u opt i on allow s you to s et th e color in which yo ur i ma ges w il l be c aptur ed. The def aul t Co lo r setting is F ull C ol or . The Co lo r setting r esets t o F ull C olo r w hen y ou t ur n the ca mer a off .
Ch apter 2: T a k in g pictu r es a nd rec ordi ng video cli ps 4 0 Res o lu ti o n Thi s Capt ure me nu op tio n allo w s y ou to se t the r esoluti on (numbe r of p i xe ls) a t whi ch y ou r imag es w ill be ca ptur ed . The defau l t Res o lu t io n se t ting is 4MP - 22 7 2 x 1712 . T he Re so l ut io n se t tin g r emains se t wh en yo u t u rn t h e c a m e r a o f f. NO TE Th e Re s o l u t i o n set tin g automatica lly c ha nges whe n y ou ar e usi n g digi tal z o om. A t the de fa ult 4MP - 22 7 2 x 17 12 pi xels (4 Me gapi x e ls) se tting , the ca ptur ed ima ge wil l b e f ull si z e. At th e 1M P - 1 13 6 x 8 4 8 p ix el s (1 Megapix el) set t i ng , t h e image will be 1/4 s i ze . NO TE Th e Re s o l u t i o n setting aff ects th e n umb er o f im age s th at can be saved on y our me mory car d. Fe wer i mages will be sa v ed o n th e mem ory c ar d at t he d ef au lt , hi ghe r Re so l ut io n se tting of 4MP - 2 27 2 x 1 712 than at the lo wer Re so l ut io n se tting of 1 MP - 11 3 6 x 848 . S ee Me mo ry car d ca pac it y on page 102. Compr ess io n Thi s Captu re men u opt i on allow s you to set how much J P EG c ompressio n y ou r image s w ill h av e . T he came r a h as t h re e c o m p res s i o n s e t t i n gs : Best , Better , a nd Good .
Ch apter 2: T a k in g pictu r es a nd rec ordi ng video cli ps 4 1 The defau l t Compr es si o n setting is Better . T he Com pr essi on se tting r emains se t whe n yo u turn the camer a of f . NO TE Th e Compr ess ion se t ting af fec ts the n umber o f imag es t ha t can be sa ve d o n y our mem ory car d . F e we r imag es w il l be saved on th e memor y c ar d at th e Best setting than at t he defa u lt Better se t t i ng. S im i la rly , fewer i m ag es wi l l b e sav e d at the def ault Better set tin g than at the Good se tting . S ee Memo ry car d ca pac it y on page 102. Setup Selec ting this Cap tur e menu opt ion d isplay s the Setup men u . F o r information about the Setup m enu , se e Chapt er 6: A dju sting t he came r a se ttings on page 63. Icon Setting Des cr ipti on Best This setting pro d uces the highes t-qual ity image s, but u ses th e mo st memory . This is reco mmen ded if yo u plan to en lar ge images, o r prin t images to a size larger than 18 by 24 cm (or 8 b y 10 inches). Better This setting pro d uces high-quality images and requir es le ss memory th an the Bes t setting. This is recommended for printing imag es up to 18 by 24 cm (o r 8 by 10 inches). Good This is the mo st memory-efficient setting , ideal for ima ges that you want to e-mail or post to the I nternet.
Ch apter 2: T a k in g pictu r es a nd rec ordi ng video cli ps 4 2
Cha pter 3: R ev ie wi ng images and v ide o clip s 43 C hapter 3 : Re vi e win g ima g es a nd vi d e o c l i ps Usi n g pl ay ba c k After you hav e tak en some p ict ur es or v ideo clips, yo u can u se Pl ayb a ck to r evie w t hem. NO TE Y our cam er a can be in a n y mode ( Sti l l , Self- Timer , or Vi de o ) whe n us ing Play b a ck to r eview imag es or vi d e o c l i p s . 1 Pr ess t he Pl ay button to act i vate Pl ayb a ck . T he m ost r ecent l y ta k e n or vi e wed image or vi deo clip appea r s on the Image D isplay . 2 Use th e but tons on the Contr ol ler to scrol l th r o ug h y o ur im ages and video cli ps. Pr es s and h old the or a rrow t o s c ro l l au t o m a t i c a l l y . NO TE Y ou only se e t he f i r s t fr am e of each video cli p , which is in dica ted b y t he Vide o ic on . Y o u can u se the Pl ay option in the Pl a yb a c k men u to pla y v ideo or audio cl ips. See Usin g the pl a yba ck menu o n pa ge 4 5. 3 T o tu r n th e Ima ge D ispl a y o ff aft er r e vi e w ing y our imag es and vide o clips, press the Pl ay bu t t on ag ain. In a dditio n to see ing the imag es or t he f ir st f r ame s o f v id eo cli ps on the Image Dis pla y , som e i nf ormation about each ima ge or v id eo clip is als o dis pl ay ed in Play b a ck . T he follo wing table describes the i nfor mation t h at you may see disp la y ed for ea ch ima g e or v id eo clip while in Pl ayb a ck .
4 4 hp p hotos mar t 850 userâ s ma nua l # Ico n Des cr ipti on 1 or âBattery leve l when using batteries (act ual icon shown depen ds o n th e state of your camera batteries) âA C pow er when using t he optional HP A C adapt e r or Ca mer a Do c k 2 D i sp lays for th e fi r s t few se co n d s to i nd i ca te that you can scr ol l thr oug h othe r images or vide o cl i ps 3 or âI ndic ates im age has an audio cli p âIn dicat es a v ideo cli p 4 5 o f 14 T he c ur r ent i ma ge n umbe r o f th e t ot al nu mber of ima ges on the memor y ca r d 1 2 3 4
Cha pter 3: R ev ie wi ng images and v ide o clip s 4 5 Usi ng th e p l a yba c k m en u The Play b a ck me nu allo w s y ou t o pl a y a udio and v id eo clip s, delete i mages and video cl ips or f ormat the me mo r y c ar d, and ma gnify an image on the Image Disp lay . F r om t he Playba ck menu , you ca n also a ccess the Se tu p m enu to se t a n umbe r of prefere nc e s o n th e c a me ra. NO TE Y our cam er a can be in a n y mode ( Sti l l , Self- Timer , or Vid e o ) wh en u sing t he Pl ayb a c k me n u options. 1 To d i s p l a y t h e Pl ayb a ck me n u , pr ess th e Me n u/ OK button w h il e yo u ar e in Pla yb a ck . I f y o u a r e not currentl y in Pl ayb a ck , pr ess th e Pl ay but ton f irst , then pr es s the Men u/OK but ton . 2 Use th e but tons on the Contr ol ler to m ov e to the imag e or v ideo cl ip you w a nt to use . 3 Us e the bu ttons on the Controller , to hi ghli gh t the menu options on the left of the Ima ge Displ a y . S elect a hig h l igh ted opti on b y p r essing t he Men u/ OK butt on . NO TE Wh il e a Pla yb a ck menu option i s selected , yo u can use th e butto ns o n th e Cont rol le r to scr ol l to other ima ges an d v id eo clip s. T his is u sef ul fo r perf or ming th e same action on sev er a l ima ges or vi deo clips, s uch as deleti ng mult iple i mages or vi de o clips. 4 To e x i t t h e P la ybac k me nu and r etur n to v ie w ing im ages in Pl ayb a ck , highl ight t he E X IT PL A Y BA C K M E N U opt i on and pr es s th e Menu /OK butto n. Th e f ollowing table su mmar i z es each of the Pl ayb a c k menu options a nd descr ibes the i nfor mation in th e bott om r ight cor ner of ea ch image whil e the Playb ack men u is dis pla y ed .
46 hp p ho tosmar t 850 user â s manual # Ic on Desc r ipti on 1 Ex its th e Pl ayb a c k me n u 2 or âPla ys an audio cli p âP la y s a v i deo cl ip 3 Delet es e i ther the curr ent i mage or vi deo cl ip , or a ll im ages and video cl ips , or for mats the me mo ry car d 4 Mag n i f i es t he dis pla y ed im age b y 4x 5D i s p l a y s t h e Setup m enu , which al lo ws yo u to set a number of pr ef erences on the camera 6 and /or âV isible if the c ur r ent imag e is s elect e d f or e- m a i l o r o th e r e- s er v i ce i n t h e Sha r e menu (see pag e 5 2) âV isible if the c ur r ent imag e is se l ect ed f or pr inting in the Shar e men u (s ee pag e 5 2) 1 2 4 3 5 10 8 7 9 6
Cha pter 3: R ev ie wi ng images and v ide o clip s 4 7 Pl a y Selec ting this Playba ck menu opt ion causes the ca mer a to play either an au dio clip th at is a ttac hed t o t he c u r r ently di splay e d stil l imag e , or the c u r r ent vi deo clip . Y ou cannot sel ect t his op tion if the r e is n o a udi o clip atta ched t o the cur r ent im age , or no v id eo cl ip currently d isplayed. Y ou can adjust the audio v ol ume by pr ess ing th e buttons on the Contr oller whil e the a udio c lip or v ide o clip is p lay ing . T o st op the clip whil e it is pla y ing , p r ess t he Men u/ OK button. 7 4 MP Sho w s the Re so l ut io n (su ch as 4MP ) and Compr es sio n (such as t he 2 st a r s f or Bett er ) f or the c u r r en t image , or bla nk if it is a v id e o clip 8 5 o f 14 Show s t he cur rent image n u mber of the tot a l numb er on t he m emo r y c ar d 9d a t e / time Sho ws the dat e an d time that t he cu r r ent ima ge was t a ken 10 0:2 5 or 0:2 5 âVis ible if the c ur r ent imag e has an au di o cl ip att ache d to it . T he le ngth of th e au di o cl ip is disp la ye d to th e r i ght o f t he ic on . âV isible if the c urr ent imag e is a vi deo clip . Th e l e ngth of t he vi deo clip is disp la yed to the r ight o f the icon . # Ic on Desc r ipti on
48 h p p hotos mar t 850 userâ s ma nua l Delete Selec ting this Playba ck menu opt ion dis pla ys th e De lete scr een, which l ist s sev er a l options: z Cance l â R et urns to the Playb ack menu z Thi s Ima ge â Deletes the c u r rentl y dis pla yed im age or v ideo clip z All Im ages â Deletes a ll of the ima g e s an d v id eo clip s on th e memor y card z Fo r m a t C a r d â Deletes al l of the ima g e s, v ide o clip s, an d f iles on t he mem ory car d , an d t hen for mat s the memor y ca r d U se the b uttons on t h e Contr ol ler to h ighl ight an option , a nd then press t he Me nu/ OK butt o n to se lect it . Magni fy Selec ting this Playba ck menu opt ion enlarges the im age on the Image Di spla y . T h is option is only f or v ie w ing an image o n t he Ima ge Disp la y; it do es no t per manen tly alter th e i mage . Y ou ca nnot selec t t his op ti on if a v id eo clip is c u r r ently di splay e d .
Cha pter 3: R ev ie wi ng images and v ide o clip s 49 Sel ecting this opti o n m agnif ies the imag e 4x. The center p o r tion of the ma gnif ied im age is disp la y ed a lo ng wi th fou r a rr ows , wh ich i nd i ca te t ha t y ou can sc r oll ar oun d th e m agnif ied imag e b y pr essi ng the a n d buttons on t he Controller . Pr ess th e Me n u/ OK bu tton t o ex it the magnif ied imag e and r et urn to the Pl a yb a c k men u . Setup Selec ting this Playba ck menu opt ion dis play s th e Set u p men u . Fo r inf or matio n a bout the Setup men u , see Cha p ter 6 : Adjusting the ca mer a set tin gs on page 63.
Cha pter 3: R ev ie wi ng images and v ide o clip s 5 0
Cha pter 4 : Using hp inst ant shar e 5 1 C hapter 4 : Using hp ins tant sh are This ca mer a has an e x c i ting featur e calle d HP Inst ant Share . T his f eatur e l ets yo u select imag es in the camer a to be aut omat ically pr oc essed lat e r when t he c amer a i s connected t o y our computer or to certain HP pr int ers . F o r e x a mple , y o u can sele ct i mages th at y o u w a nt to have pr inted , th en connect the camer a to the com puter o r pr inter , and the sel ected i mages will b e pr i n ted a utomat i c al l y . As an other ex a mple , y ou ca n sele ct i mages in the ca mer a to be a ut om ati cally p r oces sed b y HPâs e -ma il se r v ice . Wh e n the camer a connec ts to y our comput er , the s electe d image s ar e e-m ailed t o f amil y , f ri en ds, o r an y e -mail ad dr es s tha t y ou spec ify . The de tails a bou t this ar e e xp lained l ate r in this chapter . When y ou press the Sh ar e b utt on o n t he ca mer a , the mo st r ece ntl y tak en or v i e we d image a ppear s on t he Im age Disp la y , alo n g w ith an y pr int o r oth e r destin ati ons t hat h a ve bee n selected f or the imag e . Y ou ca n u se the button s on the Contr ol ler to s cr ol l th r ou gh the i mages to see dest inat ions f or the ot her imag es in t he camer a .
5 2 hp phot osma r t 850 userâs m anu al Usin g th e sh are me nu When y ou press the Sh ar e button, the Sh ar e men u also dis pla ys in the upper righ t -hand corner of the Image D ispl a y . The follo wing tabl e descr ibes each of t he Share menu options. NO TE Y our cam er a can be in an y mode ( St il l , Self - Timer , or Vid e o ) whe n u sing t he Sh ar e me n u options. # Icon Des cr ipt ion 1 Pr int 1 cop y o f c ur r ent ima ge w hen co nnec ted t o a computer or printer . By def ault , th e pi c tur e is pr inted 10 b y 15 cm ( 4 b y 6 inches) . 2 Pr int 2 cop ies of c u r r ent image when connect e d t o a computer or printer . 3 C us tomi z e this m enu ... lets y ou add e-ma il addresses and other e -s er v ices to th e Shar e me nu . T his pr ocedur e is e xpl ained l a te r in this c hapt er . 4 Che ck ma r k ind icates the d esti natio n has be en select ed for t he curr ently d isp la yed image. (Y ou can sel ect more than on e dest ination per ima ge .) 1 2 3 4
Cha pter 4 : Using hp inst ant shar e 5 3 U sing hp inst ant shar e to print pi cture s 1 T u rn on t he c amer a , and t hen pr es s the Sha r e bu t t on . 2 Use th e but tons on the Contr ol ler to scrol l to th e imag e y ou want to print . NO TE V ideo c lips canno t be sele cted f or pr inting . 3 Use the buttons on the Contr o ller to scroll to the pr int op tion y ou w ant in t he Shar e men u . 4 Pr ess t he Me n u/ OK bu t t on to select the pr int o pti on , and a appe ars ne x t to that pr int option. NO TE Yo u c a n s e l e c t t h e Pr i nt 1 cop y and t he Pr int 2 copie s pr i nt options f or a n imag e so that 3 copies of the im age will be pr i nted wh en con necte d to a computer o r printer . 5 Sc r ol l to other images by u s ing the buttons on t he Contr ol ler , an d r epe at st ep s 3 and 4 t o sele ct pr int options for e ach i mage . 6 When you ar e f i nishe d sel ecti n g a ll t he imag es you want to hav e pr in ted , pr es s t he Sha r e but ton to e xit th e Shar e menu . 7 T h e ne xt time y ou c on nec t t he came r a to y ou r com pu te r or a com patible pr inter , the images you s elec ted w ill be automat ically pr i nted. See Chapter 5: Unloa ding, pr inti ng , and displaying ima ges o n pa ge 59 fo r i n form at io n ab o ut connecting the came r a to a comput er or pr inter . NO TE Th e Shar e me nu c r eate s a st anda r d Di gita l Prin t Or de r F o rma t ( D PO F) fil e for p rin t op ti on s.
54 hp p ho tosmar t 850 user â s manual Usin g th e hp in stan t share e- mail serv ice U sing HP Inst ant Sha r e to e-mail ima ges in v olv es th r ee step s: 1 A dding e-m ail ad dr ess es t o t he came r a âs Sha r e men u (using your comput er and the ca mer a together ) . 2 Selec ting imag es t o b e e-mailed (u sing th e Sh a r e menu on the c ame r a ) . 3 Con nec ti ng th e ca mera to your c omputer to se nd the im ages yo u s el e c t e d. Addi ng , modif yin g, a nd r em o ving e-m ail address e s NO TE Y ou w ill need an I nter net connec tion t o comp lete this pr o ced ur e on a Windo ws computer . 1 T u rn on t he c amer a , and t hen pr es s the Sha r e bu t t on . 2 H ighli ght the Cu sto m i z e this men u ... op ti on and pr ess the Me n u/O K bu t ton. A messa ge on the Ima ge Di splay app ea rs as ki ng y ou to con ne ct th e c am er a to your computer . 3 Connect the camer a t o y our comp u ter b y u s ing t he U SB cab le or an opti onal HP Ca mer a Do ck . T his ac tiv ates the Ca mer a Sh ar e Men u Set up W i z ar d . 4 F rom t he f irst w indow of the W i z ar d on the computer , clic k on Re t r ieve from Ca m e r a . 5 In the scr een ca lled Modify S har e Men u : ⢠On W i ndo ws, check to se e that Photo E -ma il is v isibl e abov e the Add... button , then cl i ck on the A dd ... but ton . ⢠On Mac into sh , cli ck o n the Ad d.. . but ton .
Cha pter 4 : Using hp inst ant shar e 5 5 6 If you ar e using a: ⢠Window s computer , y ou will be asked to s ign i n to HP âs P assp ort pr ogram . HP P a s sport a llo ws y ou to u se HP âs fr ee e-m ail ser vi ce and other ser v ices t hat may be a va ilab le in th e f u tur e . T he f ir st time y ou s e e th is sc r een , y ou wil l need to r egi ster as a ne w u ser . F ol lo w the in structions on the screen to register . ⢠Mac into sh comp ut er , add t he e-mail ad dr ess es y ou w an t . T h en skip to ste p 8 . 7 On ce y ou have succ essfully r e gistered , s ign in to t he HP P assp ort pr og r am, and then the Phot o E -ma il Setup sc r e e n w ill a ppear . He r e , y ou ca n ent er an e-ma il addr es s and spec ify ho w y ou w a n t it t o app e ar in the camer a âs Sha r e me nu . Y ou can al so en ter a su bj ect and m e ss a g e to g o w ith al l e-ma il s that w il l b e sent to tha t addr es s . A f ter complet in g the for m, click Ne xt . I n the confirmat ion scr e en that appe ars, cl i ck Fi n i s h . 8 Y our newl y adde d e-mail destin ation s hould no w appe ar i n the M o dify Sh ar e Men u sc reen (in the Cu rr e nt S ha re M enu se ction) . T o add add ition al e- mail addr ess es to the c amera Shar e menu , repe at steps 5 - 7 on Windo ws, or steps 5-6 on Mac intosh. If y ou a r e using a Windo ws comput er , you w i ll n ot need to si gn in to t he HP P a ssport pr ogr am ag ain. 9 When y ou have f ini shed addin g e-mail ad dr es ses, clic k on Sa ve to Cam er a on a Windo ws computer or clic k on Ne xt on a Macintosh computer to add t he ne w addr ess es to the camer a Sha r e menu . When the computer conf irms that the a d d re ss e s we re s a ve d to yo u r c a m e ra, d i s c o n n e c t th e camer a fr om the com pu ter , and pr ess th e Sha r e bu t t on t o v ie w the ne w e-m ail des tinati ons in the Shar e menu . 10 Y ou a r e now r e ad y to se lect imag es on the ca m er a to be e-ma iled . See the ne xt section f or how t o do this.
56 h p p hotos mar t 850 userâ s ma nua l Sel ec ting im ag es to be e-m ailed 1 T u rn on t he c amer a , and t hen pr es s the Sha r e bu t t on . 2 Use th e but tons on the Contr ol ler to scrol l to th e imag e y ou want to e-mai l . NO TE V ide o clip s cannot be s elect ed fo r e-m ail . 3 Use the buttons on the Contr o ller to scroll to the e-mail de stina tio n that y ou w ant t o se lect . 4 Press the Me n u/O K bu t ton to select th e e -mail desti nation, and a app ears next to that e -ma il desti nation. NO TE Y ou ca n sel ect m or e th an o ne e- mai l de stin ati on o r pr int op tion f or an image . 5 Sc r ol l to other images by u s ing the buttons on t he Contr ol ler , an d r epe at ste ps 3 an d 4 to se lect e- mail desti nation s for each i mage. 6 When you ar e f i nishe d sel ecti n g a ll t he imag es you want to e-ma il , pr es s t h e Share button to e xit the Sha r e me n u . 7 Th e next time y ou connect the came r a to yo ur comput er , the i m a g e s y o u s e l e c t e d f o r e - m a i l w i l l b e s e n t t o t h e i r r e s p e c t i v e desti nation s. See C hap ter 5: U nload i n g, pr inting , and di splay i ng im ages on pa ge 5 9 f or infor mation about connecting the cam e r a t o a com put er . Th e w a y i mages ar e e - mailed w or ks di ffe r en tly on W i ndo ws and M ac intosh computer s, a s e x plai ned i n the following su bsec tio ns .
Cha pter 4 : Using hp inst ant shar e 5 7 Win d o ws Im age s ar e not e-mail ed dir ectl y to an yo n e . Ra th er , a mes sag e is s ent to each e -ma il address that you sele cted in th e Shar e me nu . Th e mes sag e cont ains a th umbn ail of eac h of t he imag es that w ere selec ted for that address, as well as a l ink to a web pag e wher e th e r e c ipient ca n vi e w the ima ges. F r om that w eb p age, the rec ipient can do t hings l ik e r e pl y to y ou or print t he im age . T his m ak es it e as y f o r peop le who u se d iff er en t e-ma il pr og r am s to be able to see y o ur i mages without the dif fic ul ty o f deal ing with e -mail attach ment s . Mac intosh Images are e- mail ed dir ect l y to r e c i p ient s u s ing the def aul t e-ma il pr og r am on your co m p u ter .
Cha pter 4 : Using hp inst ant shar e 58
Cha pter 5 : Unl oading , p r intin g , and displ ay ing images 5 9 C hapter 5 : Unlo a d ing , printi ng , and d i spla y i ng image s On ce y ou h av e ta k en p ic tur es , y o u can un lo ad th em f r om y our camer a t o a com pu te r , p r int them dir ectly to a p r inte r , o r dis play them on a televis i o n . Unlo ad ing to a com pu ter NO TE Y ou ca n al so us e the opt ional HP Camera Do ck t o do thi s tas k . Se e Ap pendi x B: C amer a doc k on page 9 5. NO TE If y ou ar e u sing a M ac intosh comput er , y ou must fir s t chan ge th e US B c o nf ig uration set t ing to Disk Dr iv e in t he Setup m enu . F or mor e information , see USB c on f ig urat ion on page 6 7. 1 Y our came r a came wit h a s pec ia l US B cabl e fo r connecting th e camer a to a computer . Connect the lar ger end of th at USB c able to th e com puter . 2 Ope n the ru bb er door on the sid e o f the ca mer a and con ne ct the sma ll end of the USB c able to the USB co nne ctor on th e c am er a.
60 hp p ho tosmar t 850 user â s manual 3 T u rn on the c amera . The HP Im age Unlo ad soft war e will launch on y our computer . If y ou hav e set the soft w a r e to aut om atically unload the i mages in t he cam er a , the imag es w ill a utom ati c all y unloa d t o the com pute r . Otherw ise , in the We l c o m e scr een, clic k Star t U nlo a d . If there w er e an y ima g e s in th e c amer a tha t w er e se lecte d in the Shar e me nu f or pr inting o r e-mail, t hos e acti ons a r e st art ed afte r the imag es hav e b een unloa ded to the computer . 4 When the u nloa d sc r ee n on the c ompu ter say s Fi n i s h e d , y our images hav e been sav ed a nd sh ar e d . Y ou c an no w disco nnect the came r a f r om th e com pute r . NO TE T o un load th e ca mer a im ages to a computer that does not have the HP P hoto & Imag ing so f t w are inst alle d on it , s wit ch th e camer a t o the Disk Dri ve setting in t he US B Con f igu r atio n su b-me nu o f the Setup men u . Th is all ow s the ca mer a to appe ar as anoth er d is k dri ve on the com puter so that yo u can eas ily cop y th e imag e f iles f r om the cam er a to th e ha r d d r iv e o f y o ur c ompu ter . Fo r more inf orm atio n , see USB con f ig ur atio n on pa ge 6 7 . Prin ting im a ges NO TE Y ou ca n al so us e the opt ional HP Camera Do ck t o do thi s tas k . Se e Ap pendi x B: C amer a do ck on page 95. T o pr int i mages that hav e been unlo aded to the c ompu ter , y ou can use the HP P hoto & I magi ng soft war e that was shi pped wi th t h e c am e ra. Y ou can also co n n ect the came r a dir ectl y to an y HP DeskJet o r Photosma rt pr inter that has a U SB conne ction , th en pr i n t im age s s elec t ed f r om t he c ame r a Shar e m en u or all im ages in the c ame r a.
Cha pter 5 : Unl oading , p r intin g , and displ ay ing images 61 T o print di r e ctly to a USB -enabl ed HP pr i n ter : 1 Y our came r a came wit h a spec ia l US B cab le fo r conne c ting the camer a directly to a pr i nter . Con nect t he s q ua r e end of the US B cabl e to th e printer . 2 Ope n the ru bb er door on the sid e o f the ca mer a and c onne ct th e sma ll en d of th e USB cabl e to th e US B co nne ctor on the camer a. 3 Adjust the set t ings i n the Pr i nt Se tup menu on t he c amer a to co mp lete the pr i nting pr oc ess. D ispla yi ng ima ge s on a TV Im age s in y ou r came r a can easil y be dis pl a ye d as a sli de sho w on almost a n y T V (tel e vision) . NO TE Y ou ca n al so us e the opt ional HP Camera Do ck t o do thi s tas k . Se e Ap pendi x B: C amer a doc k on page 9 5. 1 T o conne ct the cam er a dir ectl y to a T V , y ou mu st f irst purc hase an A/ V (A ud io/Vide o) c a b le . F o r more inf orm atio n , see P ur chasing camer a accesso r ies on page 9 3. 2 On the c am er a, check that the TV con figur a tion opt ion in the Set u p men u is se t cor r ectl y f or y our ar ea . See TV co nfiguratio n on page 6 8. 3 Re fer to the do c u men tation f or the T V to dete rmin e how to se t the TV t o ta k e vi deo inp u t f r om an e xte r nal vi deo s our ce (your ca mer a ) in stead of the antenna or cable TV .
6 2 hp phot osma r t 850 userâs m anu al 4 Connect t he A/ V cabl e to the A/ V in pu ts on the T V an d to the TV connect or on y our came r a. Th e camera st ar ts a s lideshow of each imag e , play in g an y at tache d audio clip or v id eo clip , an d th en f adin g t o th e ne xt imag e . Y o u c an also manua lly scr ol l thr ough the image s b y pressing the buttons on the c amer a Con t r o l le r . NO TE The Image Display on the camera turns off when the camer a is connect ed to a T V . Ho we v er , y ou can s till u s e the Pla yb a c k an d Shar e men u s w hil e connect e d to the TV . (T he me nu s w ill dis pl ay on th e TV sc r een .)
Cha p t er 6: A dj usting th e c amer a settings 6 3 C hapter 6 : Ad ju st in g t h e cam era se t ti ngs Usin g th e setu p m en u The Setup me nu all ow s y ou t o adj u st a n umb er of came r a se ttings , su c h a s t he came r a so un ds, da te and time , an d the conf igur ation o f t he USB or T V connection . Y ou can access the Setup menu fr om e ithe r the Capt ur e or Pl a yb a ck menu . NO TE Y our cam er a can be in a n y mode ( Sti l l , Self- Timer , or Vid e o ) wh en u sing t he Se tu p menu options. 1 To d i s p l a y t h e Setup menu , open either the Capt ur e or Pl ayb a ck menu a nd use the but tons o n th e Contr ol ler to h ighlight the Setup menu option . Then pr ess the Me n u/O K bu t ton. (F or in f ormation about these other men us, see Us ing t he capt ur e m en u o n pa ge 34 an d Usin g the pl a yback m enu on pag e 4 5.) Scr een one Scr een t w o
6 4 hp p hotos mar t 850 userâ s ma nua l 2 Us e the bu ttons on the Controller t o scr oll through t he Setup me nu options. 3 E ither press the Me n u/ OK but ton to selec t a high lighted option and displ a y its s u b- menu , or use the but tons on the Contr oller to cha nge the setting for the highlighted option without go ing to its sub-menu . 4 Withi n a sub- menu , use the buttons on the Contr ol ler an d the Me n u /OK bu t t on t o c han ge t he se tting f or the Setup menu option . 5 To e x i t t h e Setup men u an d r etur n to the Capt ure menu or Pl ayb a ck menu , high light th e EXIT S ET UP m enu option and pr es s the Menu /OK butto n . Audio record Thi s Setu p me nu option allow s you t o tur n a uto mati c aud io r ecor ding w ith still images on or o ff . The defaul t Au d io Re c o rd se tting is Off . Fo r m o r e i n f o r m a t i o n , s e e Re c ord i ng audio on p age 31.
Cha p t er 6: A dj usting th e c amer a settings 65 Insta nt r e v i e w Thi s Setu p me nu option allow s you t o set how long Ins tant R e v ie w is dis pla yed on th e activ e disp la y af ter y ou take a p ictur e . T his option als o allows you to turn In st ant Re vi e w off . Th e def ault se t ting is t o dis p la y Instant R ev ie w for 4 se conds. Fo r m o r e i n f o r m a t i o n , s e e U sing inst ant r e vi e w on page 25. Ca mer a so und s Camera sounds ar e the sounds that the c amer a mak es wh en y ou tu r n it on , pr es s a butto n , or tak e a pi ct ur e. C amer a sou nds ar e not the audio sound s r e cor de d with i mages or v ideo cl ips . Thi s Setu p me nu option allow s you to set the v olum e le v e l of the cam er a s o u n ds , o r t u rn c a m e ra s ou n d s of f . The defau l t Camer a Sounds sett ing is Lo w .
66 hp p ho tosmar t 850 user â s manual Eye - S t a r t Thi s Setu p me nu option allow s you to t urn th e ey e - sta rt se ns or for the v i e w f ind er mic r odis pla y on an d o ff . z On âC au ses the c am er a to t urn the m ic rodis play on an y t im e the e ye -star t sen sor dete cts th at y ou ar e l oo ki ng through the viewfin der . T his is t he de fa ult se tting o n the ca m er a . z Off âDisa bles the ey e -s tar t sens or an d ca use s th e came r a t o tu r n th e mi c r odi spl a y on an y ti me t he Im ag e Disp la y is tur ned o f f . NO TE If Ey e - St art is s et to Of f , the mi cr odisp la y w ill au toma tica lly tur n o ff if the r e is no bu tton ac tiv ity fo r 6 0 seco nds . T o tu r n t he mi cr odispl ay on again , e ithe r pr ess the Shu t t er b ut t on h a l f way down o r p res s th e Disp lay but t on. Da te & time Thi s Setu p me nu option allow s you t o se t the current date and time, as well as the da te /time f orm a t, for the camera. This is usually done when you first set up the ca mera, but you may need to re-se t the date and time whe n y ou a re tr avellin g to diff erent time zones, or when the batteries are re moved fr om the cam era for mo re than 10 min utes. T o set the da te , t ime , and date /t ime format , foll o w th e sam e pr oce dur e u sed in Set ti ng the date a nd t im e on p age 17.
Cha p t er 6: A dj usting th e c amer a settings 6 7 USB co nf iguration This Setu p menu o ption determines how the ca mera appe ars when connected to a computer. z Di gital Cam er a âC auses the computer to recognize the cam era as a dig ita l cam era us ing the Pic tur e Tran sfer Prot ocol (P TP) standard. Thi s is the d efault setting on the cam era. Use this set tin g for unl oadi ng an d sh ari ng on ei the r a Wi ndow s computer that has the HP Photo & Imaging software installed o n it, or on a Ma cin tosh OSX co mputer that does not have the H P Photo & Imag ing software installed on it. z Disk Dr i ve âCau ses the computer to re c o gnize the camera as a d is k dri ve usi ng t he Ma ss St orag e Dev ice Cl ass (MSD C) standa rd. Use this setting for u nloading and shar in g on eithe r a Mac into sh comp uter , or on a Wind ows computer that d o e s not have the HP Pho to & Imaging software installed on it.
68 h p p hotos mar t 850 userâ s ma nua l TV co n f ig u r ati o n Thi s Setu p menu option se ts th e for ma t of the v ide o signal for dis pla ying c amer a i mages on a televis ion ( T V ) th at i s con ne cted to t he came r a w it h an opti onal A udi o/ V ideo c able or HP camera doc k. z NT S C âf orma t used p rima r ily in No r t h Am er ic a an d Ja pan z PA L âfo rm at u sed pr imar il y in E ur ope The de f ault setting de pen ds on the l a n guage t hat y ou sele cted w hen y ou p ow er ed on the camer a f or t he f irs t time. F or m or e inf orm atio n , see Choosing the l anguage on page 17 . F or mo r e in f or ma tio n on conne cting t he c ame r a to a T V , see ei th er Disp la y ing imag es o n a T V on pa ge 61 w he n u sin g an optional A udio /V id eo cabl e , or Displa y ing images o n a TV us in g th e do ck on page 98 when usi ng t he HP Ca mer a D ock . Lan gu ag e This Setu p menu option sets the language of the ca mera interface, including the text in m enus and on the Image Dis pla y. Th e d ef aul t se tting is English . T o s et t he l angu age on t he came r a , follo w the sa me pr o ced ur e use d in Choosi ng the language on page 17.
Ch apter 7 : T rouble sho oti ng and s uppo rt 6 9 C hapter 7 : T roub l esho otin g an d su ppor t Proble ms and solu tions Pr oble m P oss ibl e cau se Sol ut i on Th e c am era does not turn on. The batter ies ar e func tioning incor r e ctl y , ar e install ed incor r e ctl y , or ar e missing. Use onl y photo-qualit y AA lit hi um, al k a li ne, or NiM H batter ies. Th e char ge i n the b a t ter ies can be lo w or c ompl ete ly dr a in ed. T r y ins tallin g new or r echar g ed batter ies. Ensur e that the batter ies a r e inse rted corr ectl y . Th e HP A C adapter is not connected t o th e c a me r a, o r is not pl ugged int o a po wer outlet . Ensure t h at the H P A C adapter is connected t o the camer a and is pl ugg ed i nt o a w or king el ect r ic al out let. Th e HP A C adapter is not fu nc ti on i n g cor re ctl y . Ensure t h at the H P A C adapter is not damaged or defecti ve and is pl ugg ed i nt o a w or king el ect r ic al out let.
7 0 hp phot osma r t 850 userâs m anu al Th e mi cr odi sp l ay in the view fi nde r does not t ur n on. Th e e ye - sta rt sens or c anno t detect that y ou ar e looking th r ou g h the view fi nd e r . T ur n the e y e -start sensor off by usi n g th e Eye - Sta rt opti on in the Setu p menu (see page 66). D o ing s o wi ll ca u se t h e mi c r odi s pla y t o tur n on automati c all y a n y time the Image Displa y is off . I re place the camera batter i es fre qu e n t ly . Extend ed Image Di s play use , e x c essi ve f lash u se , and e x cess i ve zo o m i n g consum e a l ot of b at ter y pow er . Use an HP A C adapt er to p o wer the camera wh en y ou are u s ing t he Image Dis play f or an e x ten ded peri od of tim e , or u s e th e view fi nd er m icrod is play instead of t he Image Display . Use the f lash and z o o m spar ingly . Do not u se or dinary alk aline batter ies . P u r chas e highe r -gr a de b a tt e rie s , s uc h a s â u lt ra â o r â pr emiu m â gr ade alk al ine or phot o -lithium batter ies, o r s wit ch to rech a r g e abl e N iM H b at teries. F or the best r esu l ts with y our camer a, u se photo-lithium or NiMH batter ies. Th e Ni M H batter ies y ou ar e using w er e r echar ge d incor r e ctl y , or ha ve dr aine d on the ir o wn because the y ha ve not been use d la tely . Wh en N iMH ba tte r ies ar e br and new or have no t b een use d in s e v er al mont hs, th ey should be c har ged and f ull y dr ain ed 3-4 times to r each op timum capacity . A ls o , NiM H batt er ies dis ch ar ge on their ow n when not in us e. So if y o u ha v e no t use d th em in a w ee k o r mo r e , t he y ma y bene f it fr o m b ei ng ch a r g e d. Pr oble m P oss ibl e cau se Sol ut i on
Ch apter 7 : T rouble sho oti ng and s uppo rt 7 1 Th e c am era batter ies will not char ge. Re char geable bat t eri es are not in ser te d. Install N iM H batter ies . L ithium an d alk ali ne ba tt er i es c ann ot be re c h a rg e d. Batter ies are alr eady ch arge d. Battery char ging will not s tart if the ba tte r ies wer e r e ce ntly ch arge d. T r y cha rgi ng the m again after the y hav e dr aine d awh i le. Battery voltage is too l o w fo r ch arg ing to start . Th e camer a w ill no t attempt t o char ge bat t eri es that ma y be damaged or o v er -dischar g ed. Char ge them in a dedicated battery char ger , t h en try t hem in the camera again. If this d oes not w or k , pur chase ne w batteri es. Th e c am e r a ha s not tur ned of f yet . The ca me r a o nly cha r ge s wh en i t is off or asleep and is c onnected to an A C po wer so u r ce. T o initiat e char ging imm ediat el y , turn o f f the camer a. Otherw ise , the camera w ill start c h ar ging when it tur ns it se lf o ff af ter there h as b ee n n o button acti vity f or 6 minutes . Th e w r o n g date and/ o r time is show n. The batter ies died or w er e re m o ve d f ro m th e c a me r a f o r mo r e th an 10 minut es. R e s et the date and tim e b y using th e Date & T ime option in the Setu p menu . ( See Dat e & time on page 66.) Pr oble m P oss ibl e cau se Sol ut i on
7 2 hp phot osma r t 850 userâs m anu al Th e c am era does not re sp o n d when I pr ess a button. Th e c am e r a is tu rne d of f or has sh ut do wn . T urn on the c amer a, o r t ur n it off and then on again. Th e c am e r a is connected t o a comp uter . Th e camer a buttons , e xcept for th e OF F/Mode select or , do no t r es po nd wh en th e came r a is connected t o a comput er . The batter ies ar e drained . R e pl ace or r echar ge the b att eri es. Th e c am e r a has st oppe d oper ating. R emo v e an d r ei nse rt t he ba tte r i e s . R e pl ace the batter ies if ne cessary . Th e c am era does not take a p ic tur e when I pr ess the Shutter button . Yo u d i d n o t pr ess the Shutter butt on har d enough . Pr ess th e Shu t t er button all t he way dow n. T he memory car d is not install e d . Inst a ll t he memory car d. T he memory car d is full . Unload images f r om the camera to y o ur com puter , then delete all images o n the memor y card . Or r eplace the c ar d wit h a new o ne. T he memory car d is lock ed. Unloc k the memory car d. Th e fla s h i s re c h a rg i n g . W ait until t he flash has r echar ge d bef or e tak ing another p ictur e . Th e c am e r a is still sav ing the last p ictur e y ou took . W ait a f e w se con ds f or t he camer a t o finish pr ocessing t he im ag e , an d th en p r es s th e Shutter button . Pr oble m P oss ibl e cau se Sol ut i on
Ch apter 7 : T rouble sho oti ng and s uppo rt 7 3 A long d elay occurs be tw een t he tim e I pr ess the Shutter bu tto n an d the cam er a tak es a pict u re. Th e c am e r a is in Self- Time r or Vide o mode . Sw i t c h t o St i ll mode . Th e c am e r a needs time t o lock f ocu s and exp os u r e. Use F o cus Lo ck . (See Usi ng fo c u s loc k on p age 2 6 .) Th e c am e r a is ta kin g a long exp os u r e. Use a tripod or the pop- u p f l a sh. My image is blurry . Th e c am e r a w as set to No rm al foc us when it should ha ve been set to Ma c r o fo cus , o r vic e vers a. S et th e ca m er a to Ma cr o fo c u s o r to Normal f o c us, and try t a king the p ictur e again. (See Us i ng th e f ocu s settings on page 2 7.) Yo u m o v e d t h e cam er a w hile y ou took th e pict u r e. Hold the cam er a st eady as you pr ess the Sh ut t er bu tton or u se a tr ipod. The lig ht i s low and the f lash is turn e d o ff . In dim ligh t , the cam er a requir es a longer e x posur e. U se a tr ipod to h o l d the camer a steady , impr ov e ligh ting conditions, or use the flas h. Th e c am e r a fo cus ed o n t h e wr ong thing , or w as unable to fo cus. Use F o cus Lo ck . (See Usi ng fo c u s loc k on p age 2 6 .) Pr oble m P oss ibl e cau se Sol ut i on
7 4 hp phot osma r t 850 userâs m anu al My image is to o brig ht. Th e fla s h pr o vi ded too much l ight. T u rn off th e flas h (p r e ss th e po p - up f lash as sem bl y do wn until it snap s shut). A nat ur al or artifi c ial sour c e oth er th a n t he fl ash p r ovid e d too mu ch l ight. T ry t a king th e pictur e fr om a differ ent angle . Av oi d p o inting the camera dir ectly to w ar d a br ight li ght or r efl e c tiv e surface on a sunn y day . U se the Fl a s h O n se t ting (see p age 2 9) or adj ust th e Expo sure Com pens ation (s ee page 28). Yo u w e r e t o o clos e to the subj ect to use th e fl as h. Mov e back f r om the su bject or set th e fla sh to Fl a s h O f f and tak e the pi ctur e again . My image is too dark . There w as not enough light. Wait for na tural lighting conditions to improv e, add indi rect light ing , or adj ust t he Exposur e Comp ensati on (se e page 28). The f l ash was on, bu t the subject w as too fa r awa y. Make su re your subject is within the flas h w orking dista nce (see Append i x C : Specif ications on page 99) or try turning flash of f ( will requ ire a lon ger ex posu re). A ligh t shone behind the subject. Use the Fl a s h O n setting (see page 2 9) to brighten the subject. Or adjust the Exposure Compe nsati o n (s ee page 28) . Yo ur fin ger blocke d the flas h. Be s ure to move your f ingers away fro m th e flash when you take a pictu r e. Pr oble m P oss ibl e cau se Sol ut i on
Ch apter 7 : T rouble sho oti ng and s uppo rt 7 5 Erro r m e ss a g e s Y ou ma y see err or messages on the camer a or on y our computer scr een. Er r or message s on the c amer a M essage P ossible cau se Solution B A TTER IE S DEP LETED Ca mer a is shutting down Batt er y p o wer is too l ow t o contin ue oper ation . Re place or r echar ge bat te r i es, or us e an optional HP A C adapt er . Battery lo w Batt ery po wer is lo w and the camer a will shu t do wn soon . E ither r echar ge or r eplace the batter ies. Batter ies ar e too low f or Li ve Vie w Batt er y p o wer is too l ow to u se Li ve Vi ew on the Image Displa y . T a ke pict ur e s wi th th e view f i nd e r m icrod i sp l a y instead of the Image Display . Repl ac e or re ch a rg e b a t t eri e s, o r us e an optional H P A C adapter . Unsupported ca r d T he c ar d in th e memory slot is not a m emor y ca r d o r is n ot a supported memory ca r d. Ensur e tha t t he m e mo r y c a rd is t he p rop e r t yp e fo r you r ca m era . ( Se e App endi x C: Sp eci f ica tio ns on pag e 9 9. ) No ca r d in camera T he c ame r a do es not ha v e a memory ca r d ins talled . Install a memory ca r d.
7 6 hp phot osma r t 850 userâs m anu al Ca r d is unf ormatted T he memory car d nee ds t o b e f or matted. F or mat the memory car d by us i ng t he Fo r m a t C a rd option in the Dele te menu . This will dele te all data on the car d . Ca r d ha s wr o ng fo rm at T he memory car d is f ormatt ed f or a differ ent de vi ce such as an MP3 pl a yer . Re - forma t th e c ard b y us in g the F o rm a t C a rd option in the Delete men u . Una ble to for mat Th e me mory car d is c o rru pt e d. Re place t he memory c ar d. Ca r d is lo c ked The lock i ng tab on the si de o f the memory ca r d is in the loc k ed position . S wit ch the locking tab t o th e unl oc k ed po sit io n or insert a new car d. Char g ing F l ash ... The ca mera i s re c h a rg i n g t h e fla s h. It take s longer to ch a r ge th e f las h w hen t he ba tt eri es ar e low . If y o u see this message a lo t, yo u may need t o r eplace or recha rg e the ba t teries. Ca r d ful l There is in su f f icient r o om to save m ore images o n the memory ca r d. Unload images fr om the camera t o your c omput er , then de let e a l l images on the memory car d. Or r eplac e t he ca r d w ith a ne w one . M essage P ossible cau se Solution
Ch apter 7 : T rouble sho oti ng and s uppo rt 77 Una ble to f o c us T he s ub j ect di d not pro vide enough con tr ast f or the camer a to fo cus pro p erly . Use F o c us L ock befor e taking the pi ctur e ( see pag e 2 6). Fo c us t o o f a r The f o cus distance is bey ond wh er e th e c a me r a c a n fo cus. M ak e sur e the camer a is not set to Ma c r o fo c u s . F ocu s too close The f o cus distance is clo ser th an the ca m era can f oc us . Set the ca mer a to Ma cr o f oc us , o r if se t t o Ma c r o fo cus , move fu rth e r a way f r om the su bject . Blinking The ca me r a i s se t to Ma c r o fo cu s, but t he f ocu s is too f ar . Or the cam er a is set to Normal fo cu s, but t he f ocu s is too c lose . Set the ca mer a to Ma cr o fo cus o r to No r ma l fo cus, and tr y taking th e pic tu r e agai n . (See Using the f ocus settings on pag e 2 7.) Blinking Th e sc ene is dar k and a flash is re c o m m e n d e d . Use the pop-up flash (see Using the p op-up flash on pag e 2 9), or u se a t r ip od . Red F- num be r o r shutter s p eed The ca mera i s out of r a n ge for the selected ap er tu r e or shutte r spee d . Select a di ff eren t apertur e if using the Av E x p os u re Mo de se t ti ng , o r a di ff eren t shutt er spee d if us in g the Tv setting . M essage P ossible cau se Solution
7 8 hp phot osma r t 850 userâs m anu al No im age s in camera T he r e ar e no images o r vi d eo clips in the cam er a and y ou ar e tr y ing to re vi e w t h e m . Ta k e s o m e p i c t u re s o r vid e o c li ps. Ca nnot display image P ossibly comes fr o m c o py i n g im ag es to th e memory ca r d fr o m a co m pu te r , or a corrupt ed image cau se d b y th e c a me r a n o t shutting do wn pr operl y . Use the HP s oft war e to ed it the images copied on the m emo r y car d. Also , do not re m ove b a tt e rie s o r th e memo ry ca r d w h en t he c a m e ra i s t u rn e d o n. Unkno wn USB de vi ce The ca mera i s connected t o a USB de vi c e t hat it does not re c o g n iz e. M a ke s u re t ha t t h e c a m era is connected t o a support e d p r inter or computer . Unsupported pr inter T he p r inter is an unsupported de vi c e . Connec t t he camer a to a supported p rint er , such as an HP De skj et o r Photo sma rt pr int er . Or connect t h e camer a to a computer and prin t fr om th er e inst ead . M essage P ossible cau se Solution
Ch apter 7 : T rouble sho oti ng and s uppo rt 7 9 Una ble to commun i c at e w ith pr inter There is no connecti on bet ween the cam er a and pr inte r . M ak e sur e the cable is connecte d b etw een the camera o r camer a dock and th e prin ter . If that does not w ork , turn off the camera and d is c onnect it . T urn the pr inter off a nd t h e n o n a g a i n . R e - c o n n e c t the camer a and turn it on. A supported pr inter is eithe r tur ne d off or not connected to t he cam er a. M ak e sur e the camer a is connected to a support e d pr inter and that the pr inter is turn e d on . Photo tr a y is engaged T he s ele ct ed paper s i ze cannot be used w ith the pr inter phot o tra y . Dis eng ag e th e pr in ter photo tr ay , or c hange the pa per si z e . Pr inter top cov er is open T he p r inter is open. Cl ose th e top c over of t he pr inte r . Inc orr e ct o r missing print cartri d ge The print er cartri dge i s t he incor r e c t model or is m issing . Install a ne w pr inter c a r t rid g e, t u rn th e p rin t er off , then turn it bac k on . Pr inter has a paper jam or The pr int car r iage ha s stalled Th ere is a paper jam or the pr inte r c ar r iage has sta lle d. T urn off the pr inter . Clea r the paper j a m , and then tu rn o n the p r in ter . M essage P ossible cau se Solution
80 hp p ho tosmar t 850 user â s manual Er r or message s o n the com puter Pr inter is out of paper Y o u r prin ter is out of paper . If OK is v isibl e on t he Image Displa y , lo ad paper an d th en pr es s t he Men u/ OK butt on on the camer a . Other w ise , lo ad paper , an d th en pr es s OK or Con tinue on y our prin ter . Pr inting ca nceled T he pr int job has been can celed. Pr ess the Men u/ OK button on the camer a. C omplet e the pr int r equest again. An y err or co de num b ers t hat appear T he camer a ma y have a h ard wa r e or firmwar e pr oblem . T urn the cam er a off and then on again . I f the pr oblem per sists, call HP Support (s ee page 8 2) . M essage P ossible cau se Solution Connec tion be t w een t he imaging d e vi c e and computer fa i le d The ca mera might be connecte d to a compute r through a USB hub. Try conne cting the camera directly to the comp uter, or disconne ct othe r dev ices a ttached to the USB hu b. Th e s of t wa r e cannot r e tr ie ve the S ha r e M e nu i n form a t i on fro m you r ca m era The co mpute r n eeds t o w r it e f iles to the memory ca r d du r ing HP Inst ant Shar e setup , but the memory car d is e ither missing , f ull , or lock ed. E ither ins tall a me mory ca r d, make r o om on the memo ry c ar d , or unl oc k it . M essage P ossible cau se Solution
Ch apter 7 : T rouble sho oti ng and s uppo rt 8 1 Compu ter c annot fi nd t h e connected camera The ca mera i s tur ne d o ff . T u rn o n th e c a m era. The ca mera i s not working cor r e ctl y . Connec t the camer a dir ect ly to a U SB- en abl ed HP Des kJe t or P ho t osma rt pr inte r and pr int an image . T his w ill v er ify that the image , memory c ar d , US B c on nec ti on , and t he USB c abl e ar e fun cti oni ng c o rre ct l y , or no t. The cab le i s no t connected cor r e ctl y . M ak e su r e that the cable is f ir m l y connected to t h e computer and ca mer a. The ca mera i s connected to t he comput er th r ou gh a USB h ub , an d y our USB hub is no t compatible w ith th e c a me r a. Connec t the camer a dir ec tl y t o a U SB po rt o n the comput er . Yo u a r e u s i n g th e H P C am era Do c k an d f or go t to pres s th e Save /P r int button . Pr ess the Sa v e/ P r i nt button on the doc k. T he memory car d is lock ed. Unlock th e m emo r y car d. The USB connection fa iled. Reb oot the computer . M essage P ossible cau se Solution
8 2 hp phot osma r t 850 userâs m anu al Getting assist ance F ind ing hel p on t he w eb HP pr od uct su pp ort Vi s i t ww w . hp .c om /s up po r t t o f ind inf or ma tio n abou t setting u p and usi ng your ca mer a, do wnload ing d r iv ers , solv i ng a pr o blem , order in g , an d w a r ranty information. HP p hotosmar t w ebsite Vi s i t w w w . hp .c om/photosma rt for t ip s o n us i n g you r ca m era mo r e e ff e c ti ve ly an d c r ea ti v el y a s w ell a s HP dig ital ca mer a dri ver upd ates an d sof t w are . HP accessibility w ebsite Vi s i t w ww .hp . co m/hpinf o /comm u nity/ a ccessib il ity/pr odserv if you hav e a di sab il it y and ne ed he lp . C ontac ting hp c us tomer su ppor t In ad dition to the W eb, y ou can contact HP b y telephone o r mail f or su ppor t an d se rvi ce f or y our came r a . Pr i ces , av ai labil it y , and h o u rs o f suppor t ar e s ub je ct to chang e without not ic e. Ho w hp can help T he H P su ppor t ho tline can help r esol ve p r oble ms w ith se tu p , ins tall ati on , conf igur ati on , and o per ati on . F o r help w ith non -HP h a rd wa re o r s o f t w are , p l e a s e c o n t a c t t h e m a nu f a c t u re r .
Ch apter 7 : T rouble sho oti ng and s uppo rt 83 Bef or e y ou c all R e vi ew tr ou bleshoo ting tips . Ha ve t he fol l o wi ng i n form at io n re ady be fore y o u ca l l : z ser ia l n u mber (found on the bot tom o f your camera) z pr od uct na me z date of purc hase Se rvi ce is fr ee o f c ha r ge dur ing the w ar r anty p er i od . Be y on d t he w ar r an t y per io d , a serv ice f ee w il l be ch ar ged . O btaining sup port i n t he United Sta tes F ree telephon e sup port for one yea r W it hin one year of yo u r pur chase , telep hone suppor t is provid ed to you free o f ch a rge. I f th i s i s a l on g di s t a nc e ca l l fo r y o u , long d ista nce charges will apply . Call (1) (208) 3 2 3- 25 51. Our s upport sta ff i s av a ilable fr om 6 am to 10 pm M ountai n T ime , M o n da y thr ou gh F ri day , o r 9 am to 4 pm Sa tur da y . If you think y our HP pr oduct m ight need servi c e , call HP C usto mer Support , whic h ca n help de te r mine if serv ice is re q u i re d. O r , vi s i t w w w .hp .c om/cpsosupport/guide/psd/ re p a i r h el p. h t m l f or t he nea r est sale s and servi ce o ff i ce . Af te r t h e fi rs t y e ar Call (1) (208) 3 2 3- 25 51. A f e e of $ 2 5 . 00 pe r ca ll (U . S .) wi ll b e char ged to y our c r edit card . C ha r ges begin only when yo u con nect with a s upport techni ci a n .
84 hp p ho tosmar t 850 user â s manual Upgrad e d war rant y op tions Y ou c an select one of the follo wi n g upg r ad ed warr anty options (a va ila b l e in t he U . S . o nl y ): z S t an dar d Ne xt Da y Ex chang e z A cc ide n tal Dam age Pr ote cti on w i t h Ne xt Da y Ex chan ge Upg r ade your stan dar d factory w arr an t y to thr e e years with the HP S upport P ack. S er v ice cov er a ge b egi ns on product pur ch ase da te a nd the p ack mu st be pur chase d with in t he f i rst 180 da ys of pr od uct pu r chase. HP will determine the har dwar e ser v ic e o f f er ing b ased upon the outcome o f s y stem self-test pr o gr a m s run by the custom er through the i nit ial c all to th e HP Cu st omer Car e C enter . If du r i ng y our technical s u pport cal l it is determine d that your product nee ds replacement, HP w i ll sh ip y o u thi s r epl acement product n e x t busin ess day f r ee of ch ar ge. Opt i onal Acc idental Da mage Pr ote ction i s also av a ilable. This war rant y upgr ade pr ote cts aga inst acc idental breakage such as spill s, dr ops, or f a lls. Both of these warr ant y upg r ades o ffer max imi z ed u ptime an d pr oduc tiv it y , the con v eni enc e o f d o o r - to -d oor pick up wi th deliv er y , p ackaging an d fr eight pr ep aid b y HP . F or mor e inf ormation call 1-888-999- 4 7 4 7 or visit w w w . hom eandoffi ce.hp .com and sele ct â war r a n t y upg r adesâ under â pr o duct s upport . â O btaining sup port w or ldw ide T elep h o ne suppor t is fr ee f or one y e ar in A sia an d the South P acifi c , a nd for 30 day s i n the M iddle East and Afr ic a . T h e info rmati on cont ained in this doc ume n t a nd the a ppli cabl e cond itio ns for H P ph one su pport ar e su bj ect to ch ange with out n oti ce . P l e as e chec k f or the lat est inf or m a tio n and cond iti ons at www .h p .c om /s u p po rt .
Ch apter 7 : T rouble sho oti ng and s uppo rt 85 Alternativ ely , y ou c an ask your de aler or ca ll HP at the p hone n umbe r l is ted in this d o c ument . F or English su ppo rt in E ur op e , contac t 4 4 (0) 20 7 512 5 2 02 . Alger ia 213 (0) 61 56 4 5 43 Ar gen tin a 0 810 5 5 5 5 5 20 Aus t r al i a 6 3 (3) 88 77 800 0 (or local ( 0 3) 8 8 77 800 0) Aus t r ia 4 3 ( 0) 8 10 00 6080 Bahr a in 800 7 2 8 Belgium Du tch : 3 2 ( 0)2 6 2 6 8806 F r en c h : 3 2 (0) 2 6 2 6 880 7 Br a zil (11) 3 7 4 7 77 99 ( Gr ande Sã o P aulo) 080 0 15 77 51 ( ou t side Gr ande São P aulo) Canada 905 206 466 3 ( dur ing the war ran t y per iod) 87 7 62 1 47 2 2 ( a f t e r t h e w a r r a n t y p e r i o d ) Ce ntr al Ame r ica a nd the Car ibb ean 1 800 71 1 2884 Chile 800 360 99 9 ( P o st-sales Home Comp uting) China 8 6 ( 1 0 ) 6 5 6 4 5959 Colombia 9 800 11 4 7 2 6 Cz e c h Republic 4 2 ( 0)2 6130 7 310 Denm ar k 45 3 9 29 40 9 9 Egy pt 02 5 32 5 222 Fi n l a n d 35 8 (0)203 4 7 288 Fr a n c e 3 3 (0)8 9 2 6 9 60 2 2 (E ur o 0. 34/m inu te) German y 4 9 (0)180 5 2 5 8 143 (Eur o 0. 12/minute) Gr e ece 30 1 0 6 0 7 3 60 3
86 h p p hotos mar t 850 userâ s ma nua l Guatema la 1 800 999 5105 Hong K on g S A R 85 2 3 0 02 8 5 55 Hu n g ary 36 (0)1 38 2 1111 India 1 600 11 2 2 6 7 or 91 11 68 2 603 5 Indonesia 6 2 (21) 3 50 3408 Ir el and 353 ( 0 ) 1 662 5525 Israel 9 7 2 ( 0) 9 8 30 4848 Italy 3 9 0 2 2 64 1 03 5 0 Japan 05 7 0 000 511 (ins i de Japan) 8 1 3 33 35 98 0 0 ( o ut s i de J ap a n ) K or ea , Re publ ic of 8 2 (2) 3 2 7 0 0 7 0 0 (Seoul ) 0 8 0 9 99 0 7 00 (outside Se o u l) Mala ys i a 1 8 00 80 5 40 5 Me xi c o 5 2 5 8 9 9 2 2 (Me x ic o C it y ) 01 800 4 7 2 6 684 ( outs ide M e x ico City) Midd le East /Afr ica 4 4 ( 0 ) 20 7 512 5 2 02 Mor occo 212 2 2 4 04 7 4 7 Net her lands 0900 20 20 16 5 (Eur o 0. 10/minute) Ne w Ze aland 0 800 441 14 7 Norw a y 4 7 22 11 6 29 9 Pe r u 0 800 10111 Philippines 63 ( 2 ) 8 6 7 -3 5 51 Po l a n d 48 2 2 86 5 9 8 00 Po r t u g a l 3 51 21 317 63 3 3
Ch apter 7 : T rouble sho oti ng and s uppo rt 8 7 Pu e r t o R i c o 1 8 77 2 3 2 058 9 Ro m a n i a 40 1 315 4 4 4 2 (or local 01 3154 4 4 2) Ru s s i a n Fe d e ra t i o n 7 095 7 9 7 3 5 20 (M o s co w ) 7 812 346 7 99 7 (St . P etersbur g ) Sau d i A r ab ia 80 0 8 9 7 14440 Singapor e 6 5 6 272 53 0 0 Slov a kia 4 21 2 68 2 0 8080 Sou th Af ri ca 08 6 000 1030 ( RS A ) 2 7 -1 1 2 58 9 301 ( outside RS A ) S pain 3 4 902 3 21 12 3 S weden 46 ( 0)8 619 217 0 Swi t ze rl a n d 41 (0)848 80 11 11 Ta i w a n 0800 010055 Tha il an d 6 6 (2) 661 400 0 Tu n i s i a 216 1 891 2 22 Tu r k e y 90 216 5 7 9 71 7 1 Ukr aine 7 (380 4 4) 4 90 -3 5 2 0 Unit ed Ar ab E m ir ates 9 7 1 4 883 845 4 Un ite d Kin gd om (UK ) 08 7 0 010 4 3 20 (na tional r at e ) fo r assi stan ce in inst all ing pr o duct ( f irst 3 0 day s) or with fault y p r o d uc t d u ri n g th e fu l l wa rra n t y p e ri o d 0906 4 7 0 08 7 0 ( 6 0 p/minut e) for assistance in sol vin g soft w a r e or usage pr obl ems Ve n e z u e l a 0 800 4 7 46 83 68 Vie t N a m 84 ( 0) 8 8 2 3 4 530
Ch apter 7 : T rouble sho oti ng and s uppo rt 88 He wl e t t -P a c k ard lim ited w arran t y sta tem ent T he HP pho tos mart 8 50 camer a c o mes wit h a one y e ar limited wa rr a nt y . z HP warr a nts to yo u , the end -us er cust omer , t hat HP hard war e, acce sso r ie s , so ft w ar e, and s uppli es w ill be f r ee fr om def e c ts in mate r ials an d wo rkmanship aft er the dat e o f pur cha se , f or the per iod s pecif ied a bov e . If H P r ecei ves notice of s u ch def ects dur ing t he war r anty per iod , HP will , at its opti on , eithe r r epair or r eplace pr oducts whi ch pr ov e t o be de fecti v e . R epl acement pr oducts ma y be either new or equivalent in performa nce to new . z HP w a r r an ts to yo u that HP s oftwar e will not fail t o e xec ute its pr ogrammin g instr ucti ons after the date o f pur cha se , f or the per iod spec if ie d abo ve , due t o def e ct s in mate r ial an d wo rkmanship w he n pr oper ly inst alled and u sed . I f HP r e c ei v es no tic e of suc h d ef e ct s dur ing the w arr anty pe r iod , HP wi ll r ep lace so ftwar e w hi ch does not e xe cut e its pr ogr am ming ins truct io ns due t o s u ch def ects . z HP does no t war r ant that the oper ation of HP pr oducts will be uninte rr upted or err o r f r ee. If HP is unabl e, wit h in a r easonabl e time , to r epair or r ep lace an y pr oduct t o a conditi on as w arr anted, y o u wil l be entitled to a re fund of the pu r chase pr ice upon pr ompt r etur n of the pr oduct . z HP pr oduc ts ma y co ntain r eman u f actur ed parts eq u i v alent to ne w in perf or mance or ma y hav e bee n su bj ect to inc i dental u se . z W ar r anty does no t a pply to de f ects r esulting f r om (a) impr oper or inade quat e main tenance or calibr atio n , (b) so f tw ar e , inte rf aci n g , parts or su ppli es not suppl ied b y HP , ( c) unaut hor i z e d modif icati on or misu se , (d) oper ati on outsid e o f the publ ished en vir onmental specifi c ati on s f or the pr o duct , or (e ) impr op er site pr epa r ation or maint enance . z T O T HE EXT ENT AL L OWED B Y L OC AL L A W , THE ABOVE W ARRANTIE S ARE EX CL US IVE AN D NO O THER W ARRANTY O R CON DITION, W H ETHER WR I T T EN O R O RA L , IS E XPRES SE D O R IMPLI ED A ND HP S PE C IFICA LL Y DISCL AIMS ANY IM P L IED W ARR ANTIES OR CONDIT I ONS OF MER CHANT AB I LITY , S A TI SF A CT OR Y QU ALI TY , AND FI TNE S S FOR A P AR TI CULAR
Ch apter 7 : T rouble sho oti ng and s uppo rt 89 P U RP OSE . Some countr ies, st ates or pr o v inces do n ot allo w limit ati ons o n the dur atio n of an impli ed war r anty , so the abo ve limitati on or e x c lusi on migh t not appl y to y ou . This w arr anty gi ves y ou specif ic leg al r ights an d you mi ght als o h av e othe r r ights tha t v ary f r o m country t o country , state t o sta te , o r pr ov ince t o pr o vince . z HPâs limit ed war r a nty is v a li d in an y c o untry or locality w he r e HP has a suppo r t p r ese nce f or this p r oduc t and w her e HP has mar k et ed t his pr od u ct . T he le ve l of w arr a n t y s ervi c e y ou r ecei ve ma y v ary accor ding to l ocal st andar ds. HP w ill no t alter f orm , f it or fu ncti on of the p r oduct t o mak e it oper ate in a country fo r whi ch it w as n e v er int ended to f uncti on fo r legal or r egulat ory r easons . z T O TH E EXT EN T AL L O WE D B Y L O CAL L A W , THE R EMED IES IN THI S W ARR A N TY S T A TEMENT ARE Y OUR S OLE AND EX CL US IVE REME DI E S. EX C EPT A S I NDI CA T ED A BO VE , IN N O EVEN T WIL L HP OR IT S SUP PLIER S BE LIABLE F OR L OS S OF D A T A OR FOR DIRECT , S P ECIAL , INCIDENT AL, CONSE Q UENTIAL (INCL U DING L OS T P R OFIT OR D A T A), O R O THER D A MA GE , WHETHER B AS ED IN CO NTR A C T , T ORT , OR O TH ER WISE . Some cou ntr ies, states or pr ovi nce s do not all ow th e ex c lusio n or li mi tat ion of in c ide ntal or conse quenti al damages, so the abo ve limit atio n or e x c lusi on m ay not a ppl y t o yo u. z TH E W AR R AN TY TE RMS C ONT A INE D IN THI S S T A TEMEN T , E X CEP T T O THE E XTENT L A WFUL L Y P ER MI TTED , DO NO T E XC LU D E, R EST R I C T O R M O D I F Y A N D A R E I N A D D IT I O N TO T H E MAND A T OR Y S T A TUT OR Y R I GHT S APP LICABLE T O THE S ALE OF THIS P ROD UCT T O Y O U . Her e ar e t he n ames and addr ess es of the HP en titie s whic h gr ant HPâs L imited W ar r anty in Ir el and and the U nited K ingdom: Ir e l and United K ingdom He wlett-P ack ar d Ir eland L td . He wl et t -P ack ar d Lt d. 30 H er bert Str e et Cain R oa d IR L -D ublin 2 Bracknell GB-B er ks R G12 1HN
Ch apter 7 : T rouble sho oti ng and s uppo rt 90 Y ou ma y also ha ve st atuto r y legal r ights agains t the seller on the basis of t he pur cha se agr ee men t in addition t o the man uf actur erâs w arr anty , which a r e not r e str icted b y this ma nuf act ur erâs warr a nty . R egul ato r y inf orm a tion F or r eg ul ator y i n fo rma tion, se e the r egu lator y_suppl ement .htm f ile on the so ftw ar e CD t hat ca me w ith yo ur cam er a .
Appe ndi x A: Batter ie s an d camer a acce ssor ie s 91 Appe ndi x A: Bat t er ies and ca mer a acce ss ories Managi ng bat te rie s When the b atter ies a r e r emov e d fr om th e cam e r a, the date and ti me sett ings a r e preserved for appro ximately 1 0 minutes. I f the camer a is w ithou t batte ri es f or lo nger than 10 m inute s , the c loc k is s et t o the la st da te and time at w hi ch the camer a w as used. Y ou may be pr ompt ed to update th e date a nd t ime. The follo wing bat tery lev els ar e dis pla yed on the ac tiv e d ispl a y . T h e camer a u se s f ou r AA batte r ie s . A cce pt ab le ba t t er ie s includ e photo -l ithi um , â ul tra â or â premiumâ g r ade alk a li ne , or re ch a rg e a b l e N i M H . F o r t h e b e s t re s u l t s w i th y o u r c a m era , us e photo -l ithi um or NiMH batteries. Icon Le vel Desc ri pti on F ull Batte r ies ha v e 7 0 -100 per cen t r emaining 2/3r d f ull Batt er ies ha ve 4 0- 7 0 per cent r emaining 1/3r d f ull Batter ies hav e 1 0 -40 per cent r emaining Empt y Ba tter i es h a ve less t han 10 p er c ent r emaining None N/A Cam er a is o pe r atin g on A C p o we r
92 h p p hotos mar t 850 userâ s ma nua l NO TE If y ou do not in tend to use yo u r cam er a f or e xten ded pe r io ds o f time (m o r e than a m on th), w e s t ro n g ly re c o m m e nd t h a t yo u rem ov e t h e ba t t e ri e s f ro m the c ame r a. Extending ba t ter y life z Use a n opt ional HP A C adapter or H P Ca mer a Do ck when unload ing pic t ur es to y our computer , pr inting , or conne cting to th e T V . z Use the v i e w f inder mi cr od isplay to f rame pi ctures inste ad of the I mage Display . Le a ve the Image Di spla y off when th e camer a is on . z M i n i m ize t h e us e of zoo m i n g. z Use th e Aut o f lash setting r ather tha n Fl a s h O n . Rech arg eab le bat ter ies Ni c k el Met al H y dr id e (NiMH) batte r ies can be r ec har ged b y u s in g a ba ttery c har ger . Ni MH batte ri es can also be r ec har ged in th e cam er a when the cam e r a is tur ned o ff and is connec ted t o an opti on al HP A C a dapt er o r HP C amer a Do c k . Batt er ies ar e fully r e cha r ge d v ia the opt ional HP A C adapter o r H P Camera Dock in 15 hours. NO TE Y o u m u st t u rn o f f t h e c a m e ra wh e n re c h a rg i n g t h e bat ter ies in th e camera . Some t hings to keep in m ind when usin g NiM H b at t er ies a r e: z Al wa y s r ec har ge all fo ur N iMH batte r i es at t he sa me time . One lo w- charged bat tery w il l reduce the bat tery li f e f o r a ll f our batte r ies in t he camer a .
Appe ndi x A: Batter ie s an d camer a acce ssor ie s 9 3 z F or N iMH ba tter ie s t o r eac h optim al capa c ity an d pe rf o r mance , the y shou ld f ir st be disc har ged com pl ete l y an d r ec ha r ged f o ur se par ate times . z A fte r l ong- te r m st o r age of N iMH ba tte ri es , r ec har ge th em befor e usi ng them again. B attery ce lls ge ner a lly disc h a r ge at about 1 per c ent per day at r o om temper ature . P o w e r conser v a tion T o conse rve batte ry po we r , the Image Displa y turn s o ff automatical l y i f th e re is no but ton activity f o r 60 seco nds. I f no buttons ar e pr esse d for 6 minutes, th e camera tu r ns off (un less it is p r inting or connected t o a comp ute r or TV). P urc ha sin g camera acces sories Y ou can pur cha se additi onal acce ssor ies f or y our camer a fr om y our lo cal r eta iler or onli ne a t w w w .h pshoppin g .c om . S ome acc essor ies f or the HP photosma rt 8 50 dig ital c amer a a r e lis ted b elo w: z Mem ory ca rdâ Secur e di git al (S D) or M ulti Medi aCard ® (12 8 MB is the ma ximum usab le card siz e). This pr od uct onl y supports t he use of Mu ltiM edia Card ® memory cards that have b een verified compliant to the MultiMediaCard® s p ecificatio n as of January 2000. Comp lian t Mul tiMed iaCar d® memo ry card s have the MultiMediaCa rd® logo o n the card. z HP A C pow er ada pt er (H P su pport s onl y H P A C adapters and ot her acc essor ies e xpressly appr o ved b y HP) : ⢠North Amer ica âC88 7 5A #001 ⢠Out side o f N ort h AmericaâC 88 7 5A #0 0 2
9 4 hp phot osma r t 850 userâs m anu al z HP Ph ot osmart 88 8 1 Ca mer a Dock: ⢠North Amer ica âC8881A #A2 L ⢠Outsid e of North A m er icaâC8881A #0 0 2 z HP audio /vi d eo ac cessor y cable (C63 2 4 - 61601) to connect to a televis ion ( T V ) . NO TE Y ou c an al so use an y Y - adapter audio cable with dual R CA plu gs o n on e en d an d a 1 /8 inc h (3 .17 5 mm) mini- ster eo jac k on the other end. Y ou w i ll also need an adapter plug that accept s a 1/ 8 inch (3.1 7 5 m m) jack an d f its int o a 3/3 2 inc h ( 2 . 38 mm ) j ac k . z HP Di gital C am e r a Acce sso ry Ki t (Y17 88A f o r the U n it e d S tat es and C anada , Y17 8 9A f or a ll o the r co untr ie s) . Cont ents in c lude : ⢠Cam er a ba g ⢠R ec har gea bl e NiMH ba t t er i es ⢠Batte ry ch ar ge r ⢠HP A C a dapter
Appe ndi x B: Came r a dock 9 5 Appe ndi x B: C am era doc k NO TE The HP Ca mer a Dock does not w or k w it hout A C p o w er . Be sur e to use ONL Y th e HP A C ad apter and th e cables that c ame with th e Ca mera D ock. 1 F oll ow t he s etu p instr uct i on s pr o v id ed wi th t he Ca me r a Doc k . T his inc lude s in st allin g the Doc k Ins ert o nto the dock , in stal ling (o ptiona l) rechargeable bat ter ies i n the c amera , connecting t he A C po we r sour ce , and connecting t he Ca mer a Do ck t o a com pute r , p rin te r , an d/or t ele vi sio n . 2 R emo ve an y ca ble s that ma y be att ached to th e c am e r a befor e pu tting it in t he d ock . 3 P lace the ca mer a in the Cam er a Do ck w i th th e r e ar o f the ca m er a f ac ing the f r on t o f the C amer a Doc k. Th e C a m era D o c k h a s t h re e I / O connect ors on th e bac k : âC onn ect s to th e televis ion âConne cts di r e ctly to USB -enabled HP De skJet an d Ph ot osma rt p r int er s âCon ne cts to you r c omputer Th er e i s a sl i di ng do or o ve r t he pr i nter and computer connect ors t hat pr ev en ts yo u fr om using bo th connecto rs at t he same time ( the Camer a Dock is not a USB hub) .
9 6 hp phot osma r t 850 userâs m anu al T he C ame r a Doc k h as a li ght n ear th e to p f r on t that pr o vi des b atte ry char ging status. A bl in ki ng light indic ates tha t bat ter ies ar e chargin g . NO TE Batter ie s w ill r echar ge onl y w hen the cam er a is t urned off . (Recha r gi ng will n ot occur when unloading ima ges t o a com pute r , pr i nting, or dis pla y in g a sl ideshow on a TV .) Th er e ar e t wo buttons on the fr ont that l ight up , s h ow in g the camer a is connect ed to t he ass oc i ated de v i ce . z The Sa ve/Pr int butto n acti v at es the connec tio n t o the com pute r o r the p r inte r , depen d ing on w hic h o f th ose de v ice s is co nnecte d to the do c k . z The TV bu tton ac tiv ates th e te le v isi on connec tion . The follo wing des cr ibes the functions of the dock bu t ton l ights. Sta te Indi ca ti on On The Ca mer a Doc k has po w er and a de vi ce is conne c ted. W hen y ou pr es s a button for o n e dev ice, the o t her but ton dev ice light t urns off . Blinki ng T he a ss o c iat ed de vi ce is acti ve . Off z T he a s soc ia ted de vi ce i s n ot con nect ed t o th e do ck . z The asso c iated dev ice is n ot availab le b ecause the ot her d e vic e i s active. z T h e d o c k h a s n o p ow e r , t h e c a m e ra i s t u r n e d o f f in the dock, or t her e is n o c amer a connecte d .
Appe ndi x B: Came r a dock 9 7 Unloading i m a ge s to a com pu ter using t h e doc k NO TE If y ou ar e u sing a M ac intosh comput er , y ou must fir s t chan ge th e US B c o nf ig uration set t ing to Disk Dr iv e in t he Setup m enu . F or mor e information , see USB c on f ig urat ion on page 6 7. 1 Check that the Cam er a Do ck is connecte d t o y our computer . 2 P lace the ca mer a i n t he Cam er a Dock. I t will tu r n on automat ically . 3 Pr ess t he Sav e /Prin t button on the dock. T h e HP I ma g e U n lo a d s of t wa re wi l l la un ch on you r c omp ut er . I f yo u ha ve s et the so ft w ar e to a ut omati c all y unl oad t he imag es in th e cam er a, the ima ges w ill a u tom ati call y unload t o t he com pute r . Ot herw ise , in t he We l c o m e scr e en , click Star t Un loa d . If there w er e an y images on the c amer a that ha d been sel ected i n the Shar e men u f or pr in ting or e -ma il, those actions a r e st arted af ter the images ha ve been unload ed to the computer . 4 When the u nloa d sc r ee n on the c ompu ter say s Fi n i s h e d , y our images hav e been sav ed a nd sh ar e d . Y ou c an no w tak e the camer a out of th e dock , or lea ve it ther e to r echa r ge the ca mera bat ter ies. Printin g im a ges usin g t he do c k 1 Check that t he Camera Dock is connec ted to y our pr i nter . (The do ck c an not be co nne ct ed direct ly to b oth a c ompu ter an d a p r inte r at the same time ) . 2 P lace the ca mer a i n t he Cam er a Dock. I t will tu r n on automat ically . 3 Pr ess t he Sav e /Prin t button on the do c k to star t the pr i nt dialo g .
98 h p p hotos mar t 850 userâ s ma nua l 4 A dj ust th e setting s in the Pr int Setup menu on the camer a to co m ple te th e pr i nti ng pr o cess. 5 When the pr i nti ng c omple tes, you c an take the ca mer a o ut of the dock , or leave it t her e to r echarge the ca mer a bat ter ies. D ispla yi ng ima ge s on a TV us ing t he doc k 1 Check that t he Camera Dock i s connec t e d t o your TV . 2 On the c am er a, check that the TV c o n fig u ra t io n o p ti o n i n the Set u p men u is se t cor r ectl y f or y our ar ea . See TV co nfiguratio n on page 6 8. 3 Re fer to the do cume ntatio n for th e T V to dete rmin e how to se t the TV t o ta k e vi deo inp u t f r om an ext er nal vi deo s our ce (your ca mer a ) in stead of the antenna or cable TV . 4 Pl a c e th e c a m e ra i n t h e C a m era D o c k. I t wi l l t u rn o n automat ically . 5 Pr ess th e TV b utto n on the d ock t o s tart d i s pl a y ing ima g e s on t he T V . The cam era start s a sl ideshow of ea ch i mage, pla ying an y atta che d a udi o c lip o r v i deo clip , and the n f ading to th e ne xt imag e . Y o u ca n also manua lly scr ol l th r oug h the i mages b y pr es sing t he butt ons on the came r a Cont r oller . NO TE The Image Display on the camera turns off when the camer a is connect ed to a T V . Ho we v er , y ou can s till u s e the Pla yb a c k an d Shar e men u s w hil e connect e d to the TV . (T he me nu s w ill dis pl ay on th e TV sc r een .)
Ap pend i x C : Sp ecificat ion s 99 Appe ndi x C: Spe c if ica t ions Fe a t u re Des cr ipti on Re so l ut io n 4.13 M P (2 384 b y 17 34 total p ix el count) 3 . 9 4 M P (2 304 by 1712 eff ectiv e pi xe l count) Sensor Diagonal 8.9 7 0 mm (1 /1.8-i nc h, 4: 3 for mat) CC D Color depth 3 6 -b it (12 b its b y 3 co lor s) Captu r e t ypes S till , Se lf- Time r , and V i deo Me mo ry 2 , 16 MB b y 16 wide (12 8 MB) in ter nal SDR AM Sl ot fo r a Sec ur e Di gital (S D) o r MultiMed iaCard® me mory car d (16 MB SD memor y card includ ed) . See Me mo ry ca r d capa c i t y on p age 10 2. Len s F o ca l leng th ⢠W id eâ7 .6 m m ⢠T elephotoâ 61 mm F- N u m b e r ⢠W id eâf/2 .8 t o f/1 1 ⢠T elep h oto âf/ 3 .1 t o f/ 11 Vie w find er Z o oming 1/4 V G A color sequential micr od ispla y vie w f inder with diopter cont r ol Zoom 8x optical , 7x digital z oo m
100 hp pho tosmart 8 50 use r âs manual Fo c us TT L a ut o f oc u s W ideâ100 mm to infinity Te l e p h o t o â 9 0 0 m m t o i n f i n i t y Fo c us s e t t i n gs Normal ( def au lt ) , Macro Shutter s peed 1/2000 to 16 seconds Fl a s h P op- up f las h assembly 3 second r e char ge 3 .5m at IS O 20 0 Fl a s h s e t t i n g s Au to ( de fau l t ) , Aut o wit h Re d -eye R e d uc t io n, F las h On, Night , Night with R ed -e ye Re d uct i on, Fla s h O ff Expo sur e Mode s etting s Auto (default) , Action, Land scape , P or tr ai t , Ap ertur e Pr ior it y , Sh utter Pr io r it y Exp osur e Compens ation can be set ma nually fr o m -3.0 to 3.0 E V in 0 .5 i n crem e nt s Wh ite Balance setting s A uto (default) , Su n , Shade , T u n gsten , Fl u o re s c e n t , M a n u a l AE Mete r ing setting s A v er ag e , Center - W eighted (defa u lt) , Spot IS O Speed setting s A uto (def ault ), 100, 200 Col or settings F u ll Color ( def aul t) , B lack & Wh ite, Sepia Re so l ut io n setting s 4MP - 2 2 7 2 x 171 2 ( defa u lt) 1MP - 113 6 x 848 Compr es si o n setting s - Best - Be t t er (d ef ault) - Good Ima ge Di sp la y 2 - in ch co lor CC FL backl i t , polysi lico n TF T L C D Fe a t u re Des cr ipti on
Ap pend i x C : Sp ecificat ion s 10 1 Self- Timer 10 se cond dela y A udio ca ptur e S till pi ctur es Up t o 30 seconds o f au dio can be ca ptur ed w it h ea ch s till pi ct ur e (ca n be tur ned o n/o ff in Setup me nu) Vid e o Audio c aptu r ed automatica lly with video Compr es si o n form at JP EG (EX IF ) f or still image s MPEG1 for vide o cl ips Po w e r 4 AA batteries (include d) Optional HP A C ad apter (6V , 20 00 mA ) : North Amer ica âC88 7 5 A #001 Outs ide of N ort h Ame r icaâ C88 7 5 A #0 02 O pt ion al H P P h otos m a rt 888 1 Ca me ra D o c k : North Amer ica âC8881A #A2 L Outsid e of North Ameri c aâC8881A #00 2 S l ow t ri ck l e re ch a rg i n g i n c a m era wi t h optional HP A C adapter or HP Camer a Dock (100% in 15 hours) A ut om ati c a dv anced po we r mana geme nt T he ca mer a ha s a max im um pow er con sumption o f 12 W at ts ( 1.9 amps ) In te rf a ces z US B to a compute r or US B to HP DeskJet and Photosm art pr inters z A ud io/ V i deo o ut t o TV z DC I N 6V z HP Cam er a D ock Fe a t u re Des cr ipti on
10 2 hp pho tosmart 8 50 use r âs manual Memo r y car d capac i t y The follow in g table list s th e appr o ximate numb er o f stil l i mages t ha t can be s to r ed on a 16 M B SD m em ory ca r d w hen the cam era is s et to the d iff e r en t Res o l ut io n and Compr ess ion sett ings av ai lable i n the Capt ure m en u (s ee p ag e 40 ). St and ard s z PTP tran sfer (1 5 7 4 0) z MSD C tr an sfe r z NT SC/P A L z JP EG z MPEG1 z DP OF 1.1 z EXI F 2 .2 z DCF 1 .0 Tr i p o d m o u n t Ye s Exte r nal Body Dimensions 11 0 mm (L ) b y 40 m m (W) by 7 5 mm (H) We i g h t 300 gr ams w itho ut batte r ie s Wa r r a n t y HP 1 y ear e x chang e w ar r anty 4MP - 2 2 7 2 x 171 2 Re so l ut io n 1 MP - 1 13 6 x 84 8 Re so l ut io n - Bes t Compr ess ion 5 im ages ( 2 .5 MB each) 13 images (1 MB each ) - Better Compr ess ion 13 images (1 MB each ) 35 i m a g e s (4 0 0 KB e a ch ) - Good Compr ess ion 26 i m a g e s (500 KB each) 71 images (200 KB each) Fe a t u re Des cr ipti on
In d e x 103 Index A AA batteries 91 AC power adapter conne ctor on camera 13 HP part number 101 purchasing 93 ac cess ories f or ca mera 93 active display, using 21 AE Me tering, setting 38 alkaline batteries 91 Aper ture Priority (A v) setting 35 audio clips play and adjust volume 47 play and review 47 reco rd 14 , 31, 35, 64 Audio Re cord setting 64 audio/video (TV) cable 94 conne ctor 61 conne ctor on camera 13 automatic exp o sur e, override 35 Av Aperture Priority settin g 35 B batteries door on camera 14 ext end l if e of 92 icons 9 1 install 15 leve ls 91 rechargeable 92 types to use 9 1 Best Comp res sion set ting 41 Better Compression setting 41 blinking lights on ca mera 10 , 13 on C ame ra Do ck 96 bo nus sof twar e 18 , 1 9 brackets on display screen 25 brightening an image 28 buttons on camera 10 on C ame ra Do ck 96 C calibrating color of images 37 came ra acce sso ries 93 Cam era Dock . Se e HP Camera Dock Camera So unds setting 65 camera specifications 99 came ra state s 19 came ra, turn on/ off 16 Capture menu, using 3 4 Capture mode, set 16 Colo r of ima ges, s etting 39 comp res sion f ormat 10 1 Compression, setti ng 40 compute r conn ect Ca mera D ock to 9 5 conn ect cam era to 59 conne ctions as a USB Mass Storage Dev ice Class (MSDC) 67 to Ca mera D ock 9 5 to com puter 59 to printer 60 to TV 61
104 Index conne ctors AC power adapter on camera 13 audio/video (TV) 13, 61 Camera Dock 14 HP C ame ra Do ck 95 Con troll er 11 cust omer suppor t 8 2 D darkeni ng an i m age 28 Date & T ime setting 17, 66 delete during Instant Review 25 from mem ory c ard 48 Digital Print O rder Format 53 digital zoom 3 3 dio pte r co ntro l 11, 23 disk drive, camera as 6 7 Display button 1 1 display images and video clips on TV 62 displays, using 21 dock. See HP C amer a Doc k DPOF 5 3 E e-m ail addresses, c ustomizing the Share menu 54 ima ges f rom c omp uter 6 0 images using Camera D ock 97 empty batte r ies icon 91 en lar ge imag e 48 erro r messa ges on camera 75 on computer 80 Exposure Com pensation, s e tting 28 Exposure Mode, setting 35 eye-start sensor, microdisplay 11, 6 6 Eye-Star t setting 66 F files Compression se tting 41 delete from memory card 48 DPOF 5 3 flas h pop-up flash assembly 12 rang e 10 0 set tin gs 2 9 using 29 Flash button 11 Fla sh O ff 3 0 F-num ber, settin g 36 focu s lock 26 rang e 10 0 setting 27 focus br ackets, using 25 Focus button 11 form at mem ory card 48 full batteries icon 91 G Good Compre ssio n sett ing 41 H help from cust omer s upport 82 HP AC power adapter conne ctor on camera 13 purchasing 93
105 Index HP Camera Dock buttons 96 conn ect to 1 4, 95 description 9 display to TV 9 8 Dock In sert 9, 95 printing from 97 sending e-mail f rom 97 unload images 97 HP Instant Share description 9, 51 Share button 11, 51 Share menu 52 turn on/ off 51 HP w eb sit es 82 I Ima ge D isp lay description 11 using 21 images AE Meter ing setting 38 brightening 28 Color setting 39 colo r ti nt 37 Compression se tting 40 darkeni ng 28 delete 48 Exposure Mode se tti ng 35 ISO Speed setting 39 magnify 48 number remaining 22 number saved on memory car d 40, 41, 10 2 Resolution setting 40 too dark/light 28 unloading c amera to compute r 59 unloading using Camera Dock 97 White Ba lance sett ing 3 6 install batteries 1 5 Camera Dock 9 lens cap tether 14 mem ory c ard 16 neck s tr ap 15 sof twa re 18, 19 Ins tan t Re vie w setting time to display 65 using 25 Ins tan t Sha re. See HP I nstant Share ISO Speed, s ettin g 39 L Langua g e s etting chan ge 68 choose at first startup 17 LED s ( light s) on C ame ra Do ck 96 LEDs (ligh ts) on cam era description 10 Powe r/Me mory 10 Self- Timer 13 lens cap tether attaching 1 4 mount on lens cap 14 lights on ca mera 10 , 13 on C ame ra Do ck 96 lock focus 26
106 Index M Macintosh compute r bo nus soft war e 19 conn ect to 5 9, 97 install sof tware 19 USB s etting on c amera 67 Ma cro fo cus settin g 11, 27 magnify image 48 Manual White B alance se tting 37 memory card Compression se tting, affect of 41 delete files 48 door 10 image capaci ty 40, 41, 1 0 2 install 16 pictures remaining 22 Resolution settin g, affect of 40 memory light 10 Menu/OK button 10 menus Capture 34 list of 1 9 Playback 45 Set up 63 Share 52 message s on camera 75 on computer 80 microdisplay in viewfinder description 11 dio pte r co ntro l 11, 23 Eye-Star t setting 66 us ing 21, 66 microphone 14 Mode sele ctor 16 mode, set 16 N neck strap attaching to c amera 15 mounts on camera 10 NiMH batte ries 91 Norm al focus setting 2 7 number of images on memory ca rd 4 0, 41, 102 number of pictures remaining on mem ory c ard 22 O OF F/Mo de sele ctor 12, 16 optical zoom 33 over-exposing an image 28 override automatic e xposure 3 5 P photo-lithium batteries 91 Picture Transf er Protocol 67 pictures instant review 25 sha re 5 1 take stills 2 3 play audio or vide o clips 4 7 Play button 1 1 Playback turn on/ off 11 using 43 Playback menu, using 45 Pop-up flash assembly 12 pop-up flash, using 29 power battery level icons 91 light 1 0 restorin g previous se ttings 20 specifications 1 01 turn on/ off 16
10 7 In de x power adapter, HP AC conne ctor on camera 13 purchasing 93 Powe r/Me mory lig ht 10 prev ious se tti ngs, re stori ng 20 print images dire ctly fro m ca mera 6 0 from comp uter 60 using Camera Doc k 97 using HP Instant Share 5 1 printer conn ect Ca mera D ock to 9 5 co nne ct to came ra 60 problems, tr ouble shooting 69 product support 8 2 PTP 67 R rang e Exp osu re Co mpe nsa tion 100 flas h 100 F-nu mb er 99 focu s 100 Ma cro focus settin g 27 Nor m al foc us se tti ng 27 rechargeable batteries 92 reco rd audio clips 14, 31, 35, 64 vid eo c lip s 3 2 recycl ing information 3 remaining pictur e s c ount 22 Resolution, s e tting 4 0 restorin g previous se ttings 20 revi ew p ictur es 2 5 reviewing images and video clip s 43 S Self-Timer light 13 Self- Timer mode set 16 use 24 set ting s, resto ri ng pre vious 2 0 Setu p menu, using 63 Share button 11 Share menu custo mize 54 description 52 e-mail service 5 4 printing option s 53 using 52 share pictures 51 Shutter button description 12 lock exposure and focus 25 Shutter Priority (T v ) s etting 35 shu tte r speed rang e 10 0 setting 36 slid esho w, di splay o n TV 62, 98 sof twa re, i nstal l 1 8, 19 soun ds o f cam era 65 space r emaining on me mor y car d 22 spe aker 12 specifications 9 9 state s of c amer a 19 Stil l mode set 16 use 23 still pictures, take 23 su pport f or us ers 82
108 Index T te chni cal s uppor t 82 tether to len s cap, attach ing 14 Time & D ate setting 17, 6 6 tripod m o unt 14 troubleshoot problems 69 turn on/ off auto audio recording 35 automatic audio recording 64 came ra po wer 16 came ra soun ds 65 HP Instant Share 51 Ima ge Di spl ay 11, 21 Ins tan t Revi ew 65 microdisplay in viewfinder 21, 66 mode 16 Playback 43 TV (television) button on Came ra Dock 9 6 cable to conn ect c amera 9 4 configuration s etting 68 conn ect Ca mera D ock to 9 5, 98 conn ect cam era to 61 conne ctor on camera 13 Tv Sh utter Priority s etting 35 U under-exposing an image 28 unloading image s came ra to compute r 59 using Camera Doc k 97 USB configuration s etting 67 conne ctor on camera 13 connector on Camera Doc k 95 V vid eo c lip s play and adjust volume 4 7 play and review 47 reco rd 32 Video mode set 16 use 32 viewfinder microdisplay description 11 dio pte r co ntro l 2 3 Eye-Star t setting 66 using 21, 66 viewing images and video clips 43 W wa rranty 88 warrant y upgrade options 84 web site s for HP 82 White Balance, setting 36 Windows computer bo nus so ftwa re 18 conne ct to 59, 97 install sof tware 18 Z zoom specifications 9 9 use optical or digital 3 3 Zoom Out/In b uttons 11
w w w .hp.com/photosmart Printed in Singa pore 200 2 Q2190-90010 *Q2146â90010*